JP6863602B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a game machine including a board (for example, a game control device, a main board) in which a signal line for communicating with another board (for example, a relay board) is wired (for example, Patent Document 1). ..

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-12359

However, in the conventional game machine, the wiring interval is not taken into consideration, and there is a possibility that interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) may occur between the signal line for communication and other wiring such as the reset line. was there.

An object of the present invention is to suppress interference between a signal line and a reset line.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, when the stop result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is connected to a plurality of signal terminals and communicates with a predetermined circuit. The board is provided with a plurality of signal lines for performing the above, a reset line connected to the reset terminal to reset the predetermined circuit, and an enable line connected to the enable terminal to enable the operation of the predetermined circuit. in the substrate, a distance between the signal line closer to the reset line and the reset line, widely than the minimum interval between the plurality of signal lines, the side of the signal close to the enable line and the enable line The distance between the wires is wider than the minimum distance between the plurality of signal lines, and a ground terminal is arranged between the reset terminal and the plurality of signal terminals .

According to one embodiment of the present invention, interference between the signal line and the reset line can be suppressed.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a sorting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a table figure which illustrates the expectation degree which becomes a big hit with respect to the execution mode of each notice effect. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the identification mode of the 1st notice effect, and is the figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the identification mode of the 2nd notice effect, and is the figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display device. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the 1) of the screen transition when a notice effect is executed during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (part 2) of a screen transition when a notice effect is executed during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is another example (the 1) of the screen transition when a notice effect is executed during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is another example (No. 2) of the screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. This is a modified example of a table diagram illustrating points related to the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each execution mode of the advance notice effect. It is a timing chart when the notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect. This is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes a suggestion effect. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment in time series, and is an example (the 1) of the screen transition when a suggestion effect is executed during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment in time series, and is an example (the 2) of the screen transition when a suggestion effect is executed during a variable display game. It is a 1st modification and a 2nd modification of the timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect. This is a third modification of the timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect. This is a fourth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect. This is a fifth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect. This is an example of a timing chart when executing the effect control device suggestion effect according to the comparative example. It is a front view of the game board of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is an enlarged view of the part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 45. It is a plan view of the rotating body unit (the cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 44), and is the figure (the 1) which shows the state of the game ball in the rotating body unit 800. It is a plan view of the rotating body unit (the cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 44), and is the figure (2) which shows the state of the game ball in the rotating body unit 800. It is a plan view of the rotating body unit (the cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 44), and is the figure (the 3) which shows the state of the game ball in the rotating body unit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing of 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view (the cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit which constitutes the 1st modification of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view (the cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit which constitutes the 2nd modification of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the 3rd modification of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the distribution device which constitutes the 3rd modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 4th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st distribution unit which constitutes the 4th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd distribution unit which constitutes the 5th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation of the distribution of the game ball by the 2nd distribution unit. It is a graph which compared the probability density distribution of the start value of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment, and the probability density distribution of the start value of the conventional game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit around the game microcomputer and each driver IC chip. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit around the IC chip for a game microcomputer and a solenoid driver. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit around the game microcomputer and the connector part. It is a figure explaining the wiring example 1 between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on a board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the wiring example 2 between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on a board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the wiring example 3 between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on a board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the wiring example (modification example) when the chip select line is omitted about the wiring example between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on a board (main board) of a game control device. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit (electronic circuit) around a connector part and a serial-parallel conversion circuit on a relay board.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the game machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen by the player during the game.

[Overall view of the game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The game machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the game state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the game machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game (game) displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the start memory in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a jackpot) is high (probability variation state, probability fluctuation state), or a jackpot state (special gaming state) in a variable display game. ).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes having different launching forces. Can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is allowed to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is caused to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat-plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided, and a second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening) (second) is provided immediately below the start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. A normal variable winning device 37 provided with a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37 (a winning state that is advantageous for the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probabilistic state (excluding the latent probabilistic state), the time saving state (normal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, an attacker-type opening / closing door is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having a 39c is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, a count switch 39a (large winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, a light emitting member that illuminates the large winning opening is arranged in the large winning opening or in the vicinity of the large winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass through only in the case of a probability variation jackpot. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game control device 100 shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot ends. In addition to confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

When a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the above is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variable winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 (normal figure display, lamps D10, D18) for the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the start (hold) storage number of each fluctuation display game. It has a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56). Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is provided with a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). D8), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D17) that displays the status, and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed. In addition, all the LEDs provided as a display turn on all the lights (all LEDs blink at the same time), or cycle lights (one LED turns on and off in a predetermined order at a predetermined time), or a plurality of LEDs. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 includes a lamp display unit (LED) that executes a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighting display and an extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol), and each special symbol. It has a lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the start (hold) storage number of the variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later). The lamp display unit (LED) for starting (holding) storage number notification of each special figure fluctuation display game ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but when it is not in the big hit state (reach described later on the display device 41). (Including the case where is occurring), the number of holds is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the game machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the game machine 10, a game is performed by launching a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30b provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning winning opening is dispensed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure change display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of special figure start prize memories stored is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game, as another decoration special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (blinking) is repeated (blinking) in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80. 4th symbol) fluctuates. The fluctuation display of the lamp display unit is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "lighting" in the case of a miss and "turning off" in the case of a big hit.

On the contrary, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) can be stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "turning on" in the case of a big hit. .. In addition, a plurality of LEDs (fourth symbol LEDs) are provided as each lamp display unit, and one of the plurality of LEDs is lit in the case of disconnection, and all the plurality of LEDs are lit in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning is the jackpot value), the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 1 display 51 or the special In the display 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire a large number of game balls. To.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 39a. Uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. .. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects a CPU unit 110 having a 111 (referred to as), an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120, and an output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the voltage of DC32V. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the operator's rotation operation or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability (only when there is a small hit), but other game conditions (directing, etc.) other than the probability. Can be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1), the probability setting value 2 (setting 2), the probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and the probability setting value 4 (setting). 4), there are a probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → Setting value 5 (Setting 6, probability setting value 6) → Setting value 0 (Setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work set value and the probability set value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information on the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. A display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expectations are different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree of jackpot (expected value) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot of a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Symbol random numbers (only when there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) Based on the random number generation circuit for generation and the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (millisecond)) and update timing of the random number generation circuit are given to the CPU 111a. It has a clock generator that generates a clock.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. These are connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game ball from the special variable winning device 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from the vibration sensor 65 that detects the vibration of the game machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 that takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid) to open the special variable winning device 39, and the like. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is a first driver (drive circuit) that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving open / close data signals of the general electric current solenoid 37c and the grand prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134. 138a, the second driver 138b that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via a segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via a digit wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driving driver 150 is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls as a performance display.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning balls), and the number of games that have passed through the out opening 30b. It is the total with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. The bonus ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= the large winning opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the game machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. The board decoration device 46 may include the above-mentioned lamp display device 80.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, etc. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol on the normal map display 53 in a predetermined time variation, the normal map variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display 53, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example). , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

In addition, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the game is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the game is in the normal power support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support is executed.

For example, in the time-reduced state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game is set to the second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example). 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, the state shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. FIG. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear). The process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply recovered.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the player waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as a RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c) (A1015). Here, the flag of the assumption of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM error flag indicating a RAM error is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in steps A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation mode), in step A1041-144 The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the process at the time of normal power-on (power recovery) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”). An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. Is output to (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the setting change operation (both on operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed, but the probability setting changing flag is set, there is an abnormality. , A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) that there is an abnormality in the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), The on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As described above, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the flag for changing the probability setting is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the process of confirming the probability setting (during the setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Set the probability setting checking flag indicating that the setting is being checked (A1032). Then, the command under confirmation of probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but remain when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 allows interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the process at the time of the power failure in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure does not occur, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1038), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and the unused area, a work area related to the performance information and its display (performance display), and a configuration that does not clear the stack area are also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball output rate, the base value (the ball output rate in the normal game state), the accessory ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 has a normal power supply because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”). The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Move to the processing of.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include the setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating the setting value information (setting information) which is the information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 or the like. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command for both Special Figures 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number) (only when there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure Save in a predetermined area of RWM (A1048) as the start value of the initial value (random number of initial value per hit), the initial value of the random number of the fall lottery used in the fall lottery (random number of the initial value of the fall lottery), etc., and allow the interruption (A1049). ). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if it is not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

The game control device 100 is an actuator such as a solenoid (for example, a large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set in various processes when the probability setting is not changed or the probability setting is not confirmed (the result of A1304 is “N”). Output processing for performing drive control, LED drive control (light emission control), and the like is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308) and random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and monitoring of errors (the front frame and the glass frame are opened). The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1315 are executed.

When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure game process for performing the process related to the special figure variation display game (A1312). The details of the special figure game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1314), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning device 39 is based on the inputs from the large winning port switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning port switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 of the special variable winning device 39. Is monitored, and when an abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability set value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability set value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. Whether or not it is determined (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 when it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is “N”) (A2409). When there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

When the game control device 100 receives an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. Along with updating by +1 the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 according to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during the setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the work setting is set. The value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area) It is possible to prevent the situation where the value) is changed by an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display, and the like. Figure The processing during fluctuation is executed (A2609). For example, in the special symbol changing process, necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number "2" related to the special symbol display process is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of jackpot and sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. The special figure display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the necessary information such as the fanfare command and the fanfare time is set, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set. Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the large winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Set and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A2612), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, a processing number "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the normal power support state after the jackpot state ends (the public power support state after the jackpot state ends) based on the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure fluctuation display game. Set necessary information such as (time saving state), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (number of time reduction fluctuations, number of electric support) of the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state and the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. ) Information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special time reduction period (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A2707. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and the normal variable winning device 37 must be hit by the right side to win a prize. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing right-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). If there is no winning in the second starting opening winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the Fuden fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) when the normal electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal operation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2913). In the special figure hold information determination process, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the saved jackpot random number or the stop symbol information based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (number of variation before reach). And the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2914), and the effect command setting process (A2915) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3206). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3211), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A3211). The result of (A3212) is that the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs an effect command setting process (A3214), and proceeds to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215), and the special figure game processing number. The processing number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3204). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the normal process of the special figure is ended.

Further, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3208), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3209). Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the special figure of the special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the normal process of the special figure is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3207) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 1 variation display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss or a big hit and the missed stop symbol pattern or the jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the number of rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number and the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number are acquired and saved.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of special figure reservations related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 11 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 2 variation display game (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 is performed for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A3807), and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probability variation state). (A3803). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3808). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

First, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201) and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the added value in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. The latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4302), prepares the address, and prepares the target variable pattern random number. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and if it is out of order (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (the result of A4304 is "N"), the sorting process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares (A4307) the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, and holds the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (hold). Load the variation pattern random number 2 from (for equation 1) and prepare it (A4308). Then, the distribution process is executed (A4309), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is generated from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data in the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is specified. Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is less than "0" (A4405). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to create a new disturbance. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table). Then, in step A4405, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4407), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sorting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 starts with the head data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). Check if is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, in the game control device 100, when the first data of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is completed. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (second half fluctuation). The first distribution value specified in the group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the sorting process is completed.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and the effect command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set game sequence branch table of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the game processing number of the game, and the game branching process according to the game processing number of the game is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The normal processing is executed (A7608), in which information necessary for performing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map is set. The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 22.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing (the game control device 100). A7609). For example, in the normal map fluctuation processing, in order to shift to the normal map display process, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal map game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power according to whether or not the time is shortened. The normal map display processing is executed (A7610), in which the opening time is set, the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set, and the like. For example, in the normal map display process, when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, "3" is set as the game process number and the normal map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the normal game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the normal electric remaining ball processing. Save to the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the Fuzu hit end processing, "5" is set as the game processing number and saved in the Fuzu game processing number area, and the Fuzu ending time is set to the Fuzu game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal figure per end process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the normal figure game process number area in order to shift to the normal figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A7614 when the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901). When the number of holdings of the normal figure is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the normal process transition setting process 1 of the normal figure is executed (A7923), and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. In the normal-figure normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal-figure game processing number area in order to shift to the normal-figure normal processing.

Further, when the number of reserved numbers in the game control device 100 is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads a random number per RWM from the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and RWM. The hit symbol random number is loaded from the normal symbol per symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal map high probability (in the high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state). (A7904). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7904 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7905). , When the high probability of the normal figure is in progress (the result of A7904 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure is set (A7906), and the step A7907 is performed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). The upper limit judgment value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal figure. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

The game control device 100 saves the hit flag area when the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "Y"), that is, when the hit flag area is missed (A7909). Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7910), the out-of-order symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

When the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "N"), that is, in the case of hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7912) and converts it into the loaded hit symbol random number. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915) and saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, prepare a Fuzu command corresponding to information related to the Fuzu variation display game (particularly information on hit / miss of the Fuzu variation display game) as an effect command (A7917), and execute the effect command setting process. (A7918). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (A7919), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A79220), and then the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (A7921).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3 in the random number storage area per normal figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during the normal map change (A7922), and ends the normal map normal process. In the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal map fluctuation processing, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map fluctuation time is saved in the normal map game processing number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether or not the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the game machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, steps B0003 and B0004). May be executed between). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer (timekeeping means) may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process (B0015) that edits and controls the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41, and determines the power saving state of the game machine 10 waiting for the customer. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Execute the effect display editing process (B0017). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0023 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the analysis command area. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower ranks of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.) is determined. Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, for example, a variable command (A3407). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the jackpot command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a jackpot. For example, a fanfare command (A2610) for commanding a fanfare screen or a round screen is commanded. Round command (A2611) for commanding, interval command (A2612) for commanding the interval screen, ending command (A2612) for commanding the ending screen, and the like. Then, when the MODE unit represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the jackpot command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include, for example, decorative special symbol commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes, for example, the look-ahead stop symbol command (A2913). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation command includes, for example, the look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is performed. finish.

When the MODE unit does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the power failure recovery command (B1305). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (". B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / illegal commands. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the state off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents the out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. Whether or not it is determined (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) when the MODE unit does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the set value reception processing, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting change type command (B1325). As a command for changing the setting, for example, there is a command (A1030) for changing the probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation command when the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “N”) (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) for confirming probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command during probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, the game state flag is set to the normal state as an example, but the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit" depending on the timing when this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute a process for a command not shown in FIG. 26.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is an outlier symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol (4R-A1, symbol 1), a 4R normal jackpot symbol (4R-A2, symbol 2), and an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (8R-A1, symbol 1). It corresponds to the symbol 3), the 8R normal jackpot symbol (8R-A2, symbol 4), the 12R probability variation jackpot symbol (12R-A1, symbol 5), and the 12R normal jackpot symbol (12R-A2, symbol 6).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 28) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution group corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and setting information (set value). The address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address (B2005).

The effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (set value) (B2007), and ACT the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the department is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the advance notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect (B2013) and sets the display of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set, and for example, the display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is also possible to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (set value) of the game machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. May be good.

[Execution mode of notice production and big hit expectation]
FIG. 30 describes an execution mode of the advance notice effect and the degree of expectation as a big hit (special result). In the present embodiment, the advance notice effect is an effect that can give notice of the result of the special figure variation display game, and suggests the degree of expectation (possibility) of a big hit.

FIG. 30 is a table diagram illustrating the degree of expectation that will be a big hit for each execution mode of the advance notice effect.

The effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect and the second notice effect performed after the first notice effect as the notice effect. The first notice effect is, for example, a dialogue set to be executed in the first half variation, which is a variation from the start of the variable display game (special figure variable display game, decorative special figure variable display game) to the reach state. It is a notice. The dialogue notice during the first half fluctuation is drawn by lottery in step B2006 of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect setting process. The second notice effect is, for example, a cut-in notice set to be executed in the latter half change, which is a change from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The cut-in notice during such a latter half fluctuation is drawn by lottery in step B2009 of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect setting process. For example, the effect mode may be changed to give a cut-in notice as the first notice effect, or a dialogue notice may be given as the second notice effect. In addition, the production mode of the first notice production and the second notice production is not limited to the cut-in notice and the dialogue notice, but various production modes such as character appearance production, group notification, button operation promotion production, and light emission of decorative members are used. Can be applied.

At that time, the effect control device 300 can change the degree of expectation (reliability) at which the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a big hit according to the execution mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. In addition, the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect suggests the probability of becoming a big hit when the advance notice effect is selected, the selection rate of the advance notice effect when it is a big hit, and the advance notice effect when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selectivity of. In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation to the player in the advance notice production, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the big hit and enhance the interest of the game. Further, the expectation level is set as a percentage (0 to 100%) for each notice effect, and the advance notice effect with an expectation degree of 100% can greatly increase the player's expectation as a big hit confirmation effect. The degree of expectation may be set by a value other than the percentage for each notice effect, or may be set as a relative value in each notice effect as described later.

The degree of expectation in the first notice effect (for example, dialogue notice) is 15% when the color of the balloon is green as the first identification mode, and 30% when the color of the balloon is red as the second identification mode. is there. Although not illustrated, a third identification mode or later that displays a color with a higher degree of expectation may be set. In this way, the color of the balloon can be changed from white, which has a low expectation, to blue, green, red, gold, and a rainbow (cherry blossom), which have a high expectation, depending on the degree of expectation.

Further, the degree of expectation in the second notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 30% in the case of the first identification mode (for example, green) and 50% in the case of the second identification mode (for example, red).

Therefore, for example, when the notice of the second identification mode (red) is continuously executed in the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, the dialogue notice) is 30%, and the second notice is 30%. The effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 50%, which means that the expectation of the second notice effect to be executed later is higher than that of the first notice effect executed earlier. Therefore, the player can raise the expectation for the big hit from the expectation of the second notice effect by visually recognizing the notice effect (second notice effect) of the latter half with high expectation (high expectation priority). ). When the notice effect of the latter half occurs, the expectation of the notice effect of the latter half can be used with priority over the expectation of the notice effect of the first half (priority is given to the notice effect of the second half). By giving priority to the second half notice production, it becomes easier to execute a highly expected premium effect in the first half notice production regardless of whether or not the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit. You can make it more interesting.

On the other hand, for example, when the notice of the first identification mode (green) is continuously executed in the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, the dialogue notice) is 15%, and the second. The notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) is reversed to 5%, and the expectation of the first notice effect executed earlier is higher than that of the second notice effect executed later. Therefore, the expectation level for the first half notice effect (first notice effect) is higher than the expectation level for the second half notice effect (second notice effect), and the player who recognizes that the expectation level is high due to the first half notice effect. It becomes easier to raise the expectation of (high expectation priority). Therefore, it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in both the first half notice production and the second half notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, when a rainbow-colored balloon, which is a big hit confirmation effect, occurs in the first notice effect, the color of the balloon in the second notice effect is changed to rainbow color or cherry blossom color to further arouse the player's expectation. You may. Further, by canceling (skipping) the second notice effect so that the stop result mode of the variable display game is displayed immediately, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit has been made at an early stage. ..

Further, the first notice production and the second notice production may be in a mode in which the second half notice effect (second notice effect) is performed after the first half notice effect (first notice effect), and the look-ahead notice or pseudo continuous effect is performed. , Continuous notice (chance notice), step-up notice, etc. may be applied. For example, the effect control device 300 can execute the first notice effect using the hold display as the look-ahead notice, and then execute the second notice effect when the hold related to the hold display is exhausted. The look-ahead notice can be set in the look-ahead symbol command processing (B1214) and the look-ahead variable command processing (B1216). Further, in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the effect control device 300 may perform the first notice effect before the temporary stop or the like, and then execute the second notice effect after the first notice effect. The effect control device 300 performs the first notice effect in the first step (first stage, first time) of the continuous notice or step-up notice, and then executes the second notice effect after the first notice effect. It may be.

The step-up notice is an effect of sequentially executing a single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of stages from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (predetermined step). The continuous notice (chance eye notice) is an effect of displaying a special design of a decoration that is out of the common mode over a plurality of variable display games. The pseudo continuous effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

[Specific example of the identification mode of the first notice effect]
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the identification mode of the first advance notice effect (line notice), and is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram. , Is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red).

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle) in which large decorative special symbols (large symbols, decorative first symbols A to C) are enlarged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the display device 41. Region 610c) is arranged. The decoration first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are displayed as variable “↓↓↓”.

A first hold display unit 630a, a second hold display unit 630b, and a hold digestion area 640 are arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the display device 41.

On the first hold display unit 630a, a hold display (start memory display, stock hold) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning memory) is displayed. For example, in the first hold display unit 630a of FIG. 31 (A), one hold display 633a related to the variable display game before execution is displayed. When the next variable display game starts, the hold display 633a of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the display position of the hold display on the right side, that is, moves from the first hold display unit 630a to the hold digestion area 640 and changes. Displayed as a middle hold display (hold shift).

On the second hold display unit 630b, a hold display (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 start winning memory) is displayed. For example, at the present time (FIG. 31 (A)), the second hold display unit 630b does not have a hold display corresponding to the second start memory. The hold display displayed on the second hold display unit 630b is held and shifted in preference to the hold display on the first hold display unit 630a when the next variable display game starts, and is moved to the hold digestion area 640. To do.

In the hold digestion area 640, a variable hold display is displayed. While the first hold display unit 630a and the second hold display unit 630b display the start memory display corresponding to the start memory related to the variation display game before execution, the hold digestion area 640 is in progress. Variable display The start memory display (pending display during fluctuation, holding display during digestion) corresponding to the start memory related to the game is displayed. For example, since the variable display game is being executed at the present time (FIG. 31 (A)), the variable display hold display corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640.

At the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are arranged. The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 displays the number "1" indicating the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 displays the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number. There is.

Then, when the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect, the dialogue notice 724 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, the dialogue notice 724 is a warning effect including a character and a balloon displaying the character's dialogue "Chance!", And is executed during the first half fluctuation before the reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), when the balloon of the dialogue notice 724 is green (first identification mode), the expectation degree in the first notice effect is 15%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), when the balloon of the dialogue notice 724 is red (second identification mode), the degree of expectation in the first notice effect is 30%.

[Specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect]
Subsequently, FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the identification mode of the second advance notice effect (cut-in notice), and is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 32 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. 32 (B) is a diagram. , Is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red). In the following screen transition diagram, description of the same contents as in FIG. 31 will be omitted as appropriate.

When the effect control device 300 executes the second advance notice effect, the cut-in notice 725 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, the cut-in notice 725 is a notice effect consisting of a character, a balloon displaying the character's line "First-come-first-served !!", and a cut-in frame surrounding them. Will be executed. In the latter half fluctuation, the decoration first symbols A to C in the fluctuation display area 610 are in the reach state "5 ↓ 5", and the second notice effect (cut-in notice) is executed along with the reach effect. Become.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), when the balloon of the cut-in notice 725 is green (first identification mode), the expectation degree in the second notice effect is 5%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the balloon of the cut-in notice 725 is red (second identification mode), the degree of expectation in the second notice effect is 50%.

In the dialogue notice and cut-in notice shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation is not limited to the change in the color of the balloon, but the color of the character or the dialogue may be changed, depending on the sound or voice. The notification may be changed. Further, the degree of expectation may be suggested by changing these shapes and patterns. For example, the effect control device 300 may change the shape of the balloon into a cloud shape or a spark shape to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the character or the dialogue is changed as an aspect suggesting the degree of expectation, the balloon of the color corresponding to the character or the dialogue may be displayed.

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device when the notice effect is executed]
33A and 33B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and are examples of screen transitions when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

FIG. 33A (A) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the variable display game is executed. The first symbols A to C of the decoration of the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol "357", and the hold-shifted variable hold display is displayed in the hold digestion area 640.

FIG. 33A (B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The first decorative symbols A to C are in a state of being displayed in a variable manner "↓↓↓".

FIG. 33A (C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect according to the second identification mode is executed while the variable display game is being executed. For example, when the first notice effect (line notice) is executed in the first half variation, as shown in FIG. 33A (C), the speech balloon is red (second identification mode) on the display screen of the display device 41. "It's a chance!" Is displayed, suggesting that the expectation is 30%.

33A (D) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game being executed is in the reach state in the latter half fluctuation, and FIGS. 33A (E) to 33B (H) are the reach state. This is the display screen when the reach effect is being performed in. As shown in FIG. 33A (D), the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are in the reach state with the symbols “5 ↓ 5”.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 33A (E), a reach effect display 726 saying "Destroy the enemy tiger !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen. Subsequently, the reach effect display 726 displayed in the center of the display screen is switched to a mode of fighting with an enemy tiger as shown in FIGS. 33A (F) to 33B (H).

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) according to the second identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the balloon is red (second) on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 33B (G). The cut-in notice 725 “First strike !!” of the identification mode) is displayed, suggesting that the expectation level is 50%.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33B (H), the reach effect display 726 in which the own tiger (the tiger on the player side) defeats the enemy tiger and wins by the battle in the reach effect is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 33B (I), the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol "555", and the stop result mode of the variable display game is the jackpot result mode (special result mode). ), And the fanfare production and the big hit game (special game) are started in sequence (not shown).

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device when the notice effect is executed]
33C and 33D are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and are another example of the screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

33C (A) and 33C (B) are similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 33A (A) and 33A (B). As shown in FIGS. 33C (A) and 33C (B), the decoration first symbols A to C of the variation display area 610 stopped and displayed by the symbol "357" are displayed as "↓↓↓". Become in a state.

FIG. 33C (C') is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect according to the first identification mode is executed while the variable display game is being executed. For example, when the first notice effect (line notice) is executed in the first half fluctuation pattern, the speech bubble is green (first identification mode) on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 33C (C'). Notice 724 "It's a chance!" Is displayed, suggesting that the expectation is 15%.

33C (D) to 33C (F) are the same views as those of FIGS. 33A (D) to 33A (F) described above. The decoration first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are in the reach state with the symbol "5 ↓ 5", and the reach effect display 726 is switched to the mode in which the own tiger and the enemy tiger battle by the reach effect.

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) according to the first identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the balloon is green (third) on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 33D (G'). The cut-in notice 725 “First strike !!” of 1 identification mode) is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 5%. Therefore, the expectation level (15%) of the dialogue notice 724 (first notice effect) displayed at the beginning is higher than the expectation level (5%) of the cut-in notice 725 (second notice effect) displayed later. Therefore, it is possible to face not only the second half of the notice production (second notice production) but also the first half of the notice production (first notice production) with a sense of expectation. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to both notice effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

33D (H) and 33D (I) are similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 33B (H) and 33B (I). As shown in FIGS. 33D (H) and 33D (I), the reach effect display 726 that wins the battle is displayed, and the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol "555". As a result, the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes the jackpot result mode (special result mode). Then, the fanfare production and the big hit game (special game) are started in sequence (not shown).

[Modification example of screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device when the notice effect is executed]
FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display game. In the modified example of the screen transition diagram, a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice) will be described. In this modified example, both the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be performed during the latter half change after the reach is established.

FIG. 34 (G') shows when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) and the first notice effect (line notice) are executed during the reach effect after the reach state is reached in FIG. 33A (F). This is the display screen of the display device 41.

After the cut-in notice 725 "It's preemptive !!" is displayed with a green balloon by the second notice effect and it is suggested that the expectation level is 5%, the first notice effect is applied on the cut-in notice 725. A red speech balloon 724 "It's a chance!" Is displayed repeatedly, suggesting that the expectation level is 30%.

Then, after the battle production in which the enemy tiger attacks first (not shown), as shown in Fig. 34 (H'), the reversal production in which the own tiger defeats the enemy tiger at the counter and wins is the reach production. Executed as display 726. In this way, when the expectation level of the first notice effect is higher than the expectation level of the second notice effect, the player is interested by displaying the first notice effect superimposed immediately after the second notice effect. Since the range of the reach effect display 726 can be expanded as if embracing it, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the case of a modified example of this screen transition, the first notice effect in the first half variation is skipped (from FIG. 33A (B), the screen transitions from FIG. 33A (B) to FIG. 33A (D) by skipping FIG. 33A (C). ). Subsequent FIG. 34 (I) is the same as FIG. 33A, in which the first decorative symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol "555", and the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit. It becomes a result mode (special result mode).

[A modified example of a table diagram exemplifying the degree of expectation that will be a big hit for each notice effect execution mode]
FIG. 35 is a modified example of a table diagram illustrating points related to the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each execution mode of the advance notice effect. The points here can be used as the above-mentioned effect points, but they do not have to be used as the effect points.

As shown in FIG. 35, the points (values, predetermined values) in the first notice effect (for example, dialogue notice) of the modified example are 15 p (points) in the case of the first identification mode (green), and the second identification mode. It is 30p in the case of (red) and 1p in the case of the third identification mode (black). As described above, in the modified example of this table diagram, in addition to the first identification mode and the second identification mode, for example, black with a low point (1p) is set as the color of the balloon as the third identification mode. The value of the points may be changed as appropriate, and the identification mode after the fourth identification mode and the notice effect after the third notice effect may be added as appropriate.

Here, points are allocated for each notice effect such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect. A notice effect that is executed multiple times, such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect, so that the integrated value obtained by accumulating the points of the notice effect that is executed multiple times changes according to the expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit. And the points of the notice production are set. In addition, the point of the advance notice effect may be set as a point having a negative value such that the integrated value decreases.

Further, the degree of expectation in the second notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) of the modified example is 5 p in the case of the first identification mode (green), 50 p in the case of the second identification mode (red), and the third. It is 1p in the case of the identification mode (black). As described above, in any of the advance notice effects, the degree of expectation is lowered when the third identification mode is selected (1p).

Therefore, when the effect control device 300 executes, for example, the first notice effect (15p) of the first identification mode (green) and then the second notice effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red). , The integrated value of points is 65p. Further, for example, when the first notice effect (1p) and the second notice effect (1p) of the third identification mode (black) are executed, the integrated value of the points becomes 2p.

The notice effect executed a plurality of times by the effect control device 300 and the points of the advance notice effect are set so that the higher the integrated value of the points, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For example, when the first notice effect (30p) and the second notice effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red) are executed, the accumulated value of points becomes 80p, which is the maximum in the combination in the table of FIG. 35. Become. Therefore, the player can recognize that the expectation of the big hit is high, and the expectation can be raised, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the accumulated value of the points of the advance notice effect that is executed multiple times changes according to the expectation of the big hit, the player's interest can be held in the advance notice effect (first advance notice effect) in the first half. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Timing chart when the notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect]
FIG. 36 is an example of a timing chart when the advance notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo-ream).

Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo-decorative special symbol (decorative first symbols A to C) that is variablely displayed between the start and the end of one variable display game (special figure variable display game). This is an effect in which pseudo-variation (single effect, sub-effect, sub-variation) for temporarily stopping display (pseudo-stop display) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. At the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous production, during the period from the start to the end of one variable display game, the pseudo-variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times without displaying the decorative special symbol that is variable-displayed in a pseudo-temporary stop display. It may be an effect that makes it appear as if it is being executed (multiple times). At that time, even when the temporary stop display is not performed, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as "NEXT" on the display screen of the display device 41, so that the effect shifts to the next pseudo-variation. Can be executed.

For example, in the variation display game started in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), a pseudo continuous effect composed of pseudo variations of a predetermined number of times (3 times) is executed. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo variations may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 29).

In the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 36 (A), the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect during the first and second pseudo-variations (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect, and at the time of the third pseudo-variation. The 1st to 3rd notice productions are executed. For example, the first notice effect is a dialogue notice, the second notice effect is a cut-in notice, and the third notice effect is an effect notice in which an effect effect is added around a balloon or the like. The execution time of the pseudo-variation is set so that the first and second pseudo-variations are set to the same time, and the third pseudo-variation is set to a longer time than the first and second pseudo-variations.

Here, in the first notice effect (line notice) executed at the time of the first and second pseudo change of the pseudo continuous effect, the balloon that becomes the background of the line is white in the first pseudo change (for example, expectation degree 1). %), And in the second pseudo-variation, it is set to blue (for example, 10% expectation). Further, at the time of the third pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous effect, it is set to blue or more (for example, an expectation degree of 10% or more).

At that time, the content of the dialogue notice (line, character emitting the dialogue, shape of the balloon, pattern, etc.) other than the mode (color of the balloon) that suggests the degree of expectation should be the same for both the 1st to 3rd pseudo fluctuations. It is set and the first notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the advance notice effect of the same content as the pseudo-variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, but the mode (color of the balloon) that suggests the degree of expectation changes, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot is increasing. Since it is possible to recognize that, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the second and third advance notice effects (cut-in notice, effect notice) are executed together with the first notice effect (speech balloon notice of blue or more). After that, for example, in the third pseudo-variation, the reach state (for example, "5 ↓ 5") is reached, and the reach effect can be developed.

As shown in FIG. 36B, the effect control device 300 sets the second pseudo variation so as to be longer than the first pseudo variation, and the second pseudo variation causes the second pseudo variation. The first notice effect and the second notice effect may be executed.

In the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 36 (B), the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect during the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect, and performs the first notice effect during the second pseudo-variation. The first and second notice effects are executed, and the first to third notice effects are executed at the time of the third pseudo fluctuation.

Here, in the first notice effect (line notice) executed at the time of the 1st to 3rd pseudo change of the pseudo continuous effect, the balloon that becomes the background of the line is white in the first pseudo change (for example, expectation degree 1). %), The second pseudo-variation is set to blue (for example, the expectation degree is 10%), and the third pseudo-variation is set to blue or more (for example, the expectation degree is 10% or more).

The first notice effect performed by the second and third pseudo-variations is set so that the contents other than the mode suggesting the degree of expectation are the same as those of the first notice effect performed by the first pseudo-variation. Further, the second notice effect performed by the third pseudo-variation is set so that the contents other than the mode suggesting the degree of expectation are the same as those of the second notice effect performed by the second pseudo-variation.

As described above, the effect control device 300 is executed first in the pseudo-continuous effect of FIG. 36 (B) as in FIG. 36 (A) after different modes of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. The same content as the advance notice effect in the pseudo-variation is also executed in the advance notice effect in the pseudo-variation that is executed later. Therefore, according to such an aspect, the player performs an effect including the advance notice effect that has been executed when the pseudo-variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, and at the same time, an aspect (color of the balloon) that suggests the degree of expectation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game because it can be recognized that the expectation of the big hit is increasing due to the change.

It should be noted that even in the step-up notice, which is an effect in which a single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step), the effect including the executed advance notice effect is included. May be performed each time, and the mode suggesting the degree of expectation may be changed. The pseudo continuous effect and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of consecutive single effects, and the larger the multiple times, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game, special figure variable display game) and an effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game-related effect. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). The effect control means performs a notice effect (for example, a dialogue notice) that suggests an expectation (reliability) that the stop result of the game becomes a special result, and a second notice effect that is executed after the first notice effect. It can be executed so as to include a notice effect (for example, a cut-in notice), and as an execution mode of the first notice effect and an execution mode of the second notice effect, a first identification mode (for example, a balloon is green) or A second identification mode (for example, the balloon is red) having a higher expectation than the first identification mode can be selected, and the first notice is the degree of expectation when the second notice effect is executed in the second identification mode. When the effect is set higher than the expectation when the effect is executed in the second identification mode, and the expectation when the second notice effect is executed in the first identification mode is set higher than the expectation when the first notice effect is executed in the first identification mode. Set lower than the expected degree of.

According to such a game machine 10, it is easy to raise the expectation of the player in both the advance notice effect of the first half and the advance notice effect of the second half, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a pseudo-variation effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variation display game will be the special result in one variation display game. It is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo-ream) in which (pseudo-variation, single effect) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), and a special result is obtained in at least two pseudo-variation effects among the pseudo-variation effects performed a predetermined number of times. The same content as the pseudo-variation effect that is executed earlier is also executed in the pseudo-variation effect that is executed later, with different modes that suggest the degree of expectation.

According to such a game machine 10, the player performs an effect including a notice effect that has already been executed when the pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, and at the same time, an aspect suggesting the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon). ) Changes and the expectation of big hits is increasing, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a special result in at least two pseudo-variation effects that are continuously performed among the pseudo-variation effects that are performed a predetermined number of times. An effect having the same content as the pseudo-variation effect that is executed earlier after different aspects of suggesting the degree of expectation is also executed in the pseudo-variation effect that is executed immediately after. According to such a game machine 10, in the pseudo-variation of the pseudo-variation effect performed continuously, the mode suggesting the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon) changes, so that the player recognizes the mode of the change. It becomes easier and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is used in at least the first and second pseudo-variation effects (pseudo-variation, single effect) among the pseudo-variation effects performed a predetermined number of times. , The effect having the same content as the pseudo-variation effect executed the first time is also executed in the pseudo-variation effect executed the second time after different aspects of suggesting the degree of expectation to be a special result. According to such a game machine 10, in the first and second pseudo-variations of the pseudo-variation effect, the mode suggesting the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon) changes. Can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the notice effect (first notice effect, second notice effect) to which predetermined values (points) are assigned a plurality of times. There, the advance notice effect to be executed a plurality of times is set so that the integrated value obtained by accumulating the predetermined values of the advance notice effect to be executed a plurality of times changes according to the degree of expectation that the stop result of the game becomes the special result.

According to such a game machine 10, since the accumulated value of the points of the advance notice effect to be executed a plurality of times changes according to the expectation of the big hit, the player's interest is changed to the advance notice effect (first advance notice effect) in the first half. You will be able to embrace it, and you will be able to enhance the fun of the game.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Timing chart when executing suggestion effect]
FIG. 37 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes a suggestion effect.

First, in the suggestion effect according to the second embodiment, the timing of the first pattern effect will be described. When the effect control device 300 executes the first pattern effect while the variable display game is being executed, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Here, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that a predetermined advance notice effect may be executed. The suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect functions as a genuine pattern effect in which a predetermined advance notice effect is actually performed thereafter. On the other hand, the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect, which will be described later, functions as a gase pattern effect in which a predetermined advance notice effect is not performed thereafter. The effect control device 300 is not limited to the display screen of the display device 41, and the suggestion effect may be performed by the light emission effect of the decorative devices 18a and 18b. The suggestion effect (genuine) may be called the first suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect (gase) may be called the second suggestion effect.

Subsequently, after the end of the suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the advance notice effect for notifying the predetermined content in advance as the advance notice effect (predetermined advance notice effect) according to the second embodiment. To do. The notice effect is an effect that can announce the result of the special figure variation display game and may indicate the degree of expectation (possibility) of the jackpot, but it is not limited to this and it announces that a specific effect will be executed. It may be something to do.

Next, in the suggestion effect according to the second embodiment, the timing of the second pattern effect will be described. When the effect control device 300 executes the second pattern effect, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. As described above, the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect is a gase pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is not performed after that.

The suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect is set to have a shorter execution time than the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time (the total effect time of the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect) when the suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect and the subsequent advance notice effect are executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect is completed relatively early as compared with the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect, and it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the advance notice effect to be executed after that. Can improve the interest of. The start timing of the suggestion effect (genuine) and the suggestion effect (gase) may be the same.

Further, the fluctuation time when the suggestion effect (genuine) of the first pattern effect and the advance notice effect are performed is longer than the variation time when the suggestion effect (gase) of the second pattern effect is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to secure time for the advance notice effect in the first pattern effect, which has a relatively high expectation (reliability) of the big hit as compared with the second pattern effect, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased by the advance notice effect. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Timing chart when executing the suggestion effect related to the comparative example]
Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the timing of the suggestion effect according to the comparative example will be described. FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the comparative example executes the suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example functions as a genuine effect pattern in which the advance notice effect is subsequently performed, and the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example is , It functions as a Gase pattern production without any notice production after that.

Further, the suggestion effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example is set to the same length as the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example. Therefore, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect control device 300 executes the suggestion effect (genuine) having the same length as the suggestion effect (gase), and then executes the advance notice effect.

Therefore, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example as compared with the first pattern effect of the second embodiment, the effect time when the suggestion effect (genuine) and the subsequent advance notice effect are executed is extended. , It becomes impossible to improve the interest of the game as in the suggestion effect according to the second embodiment. Further, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, since the suggestion effect (genuine) is extended as described above, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the advance notice effect to be executed after that.

[Timing chart when executing suggestion effect]
38A and 38B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 according to the second embodiment in chronological order, and are examples of screen transitions when the suggestion effect is executed during the variable display game. ..

FIG. 38A (A) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The first decorative symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 and the second small decorative symbols (small symbols, special decorative symbols) in the variable display area 615 are in a state of variable display "↓↓↓".

One hold display 633a (starting memory display, stock hold) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning memory) is displayed on the first hold display unit 630a, and the fluctuation during execution is displayed on the hold digestion area 640. Display The start memory display (floating hold display, digestion hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the game is displayed.

The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 displays the number "1" indicating the special figure 1 hold number, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 displays the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number. There is.

Further, a stage display 730 for displaying the current stage (mode, status of the effect background) is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen of the display device 41. On the stage display 730, the character "normal stage" indicating that the current stage is a normal stage is displayed.

FIG. 38A (B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the suggestion effect is executed during the variable display game.

When the suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 38A (B), the suggestion effect display 731 is largely displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41. The suggestion effect display 731 is an effect display that gives a predetermined suggestion, and is, for example, an effect display that suggests the possibility of transitioning from the current stage to a different stage (for example, a “tiger zone” described later). The suggestion effect display 731 is displayed semi-transparently on the display screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A (B), and the player visually recognizes the fluctuating decoration first symbols A to C together with the suggestion effect display 731. Can be done. The suggestion effect display 731 is not limited to a semi-transparent large display in the central portion of the display screen, and may be performed in a small display mode or a mode in which a predetermined character appears. The effect of the aspect of FIG. 38A (B) is commonly executed in the suggestion effect (genuine) and the suggestion effect (gase), and in the state of FIG. 38A (B), the player transitions to a different stage (that is, a predetermined stage). It is suggested that the advance notice) may be executed, but it is unknown whether the transition of this stage is actually executed.

38A (C) and 38B (D) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestion effect functions as a genuine pattern effect in the first pattern effect. When the suggestion effect is a genuine pattern effect, the stage display 730 is enlarged and displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the suggestion effect display 731. On the stage display 730, for example, a character such as "Entering the tiger zone !!" indicating that the current stage has transitioned to the "tiger zone" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38B (D), the stage display 730 displays the character "tiger zone" indicating that the current stage is the "tiger zone". Further, the effect control device 300 can change the background of the display screen or the like in response to the transition of the current stage, so that the player who visually recognizes the change of the background or the like can enjoy the effect of the new stage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the transition of the stage to the "tiger zone" (including the display of characters such as "tiger zone rush !!" and "tiger zone") suggests the expectation of a big hit (for example, high expectation). It becomes a predetermined notice production (so-called zone production). On the stage of the "tiger zone", a specific background image may be displayed as the background image of the display screen. The predetermined advance notice effect is not limited to the zone effect, and may be another effect such as a dialogue advance notice effect or a character advance notice effect. After that, when the variable display game becomes a stop result, the first decorative symbols A to C and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38A (E), when the suggestion effect is a Gase pattern effect, the effect control device 300 displays the suggestion effect display large and semi-transparently in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. The display state of 731 is maintained.

38A (E) and 38B (F) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestion effect functions as a Gase pattern effect in the second pattern effect. Although the stage display 730 at the upper left of the display screen is hidden in FIG. 38A (E), it may be displayed. Then, when the effect control device 300 ends the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect display 731 displayed on the display screen is hidden as shown in FIG. 38B (F). In addition, the stage does not shift to the "tiger zone" as a predetermined advance notice effect, and after that, the variable display game becomes a stop result, so that the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbols are stopped and displayed. ..

[First modification and second modification of the timing chart when executing the suggestion effect]
FIG. 39 is a first modification and a second modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 39 (A), the timing of the suggestion effect according to the first modification of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the first modification of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestion effect (genuine) as a genuine pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is actually performed thereafter. After the end of the first half suggestion effect (genuine), the effect control device 300 executes the advance notice effect.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the first modification, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestion effect and the second half suggestion effect (gase) as the Gase pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is not performed thereafter.

Here, the effect control device 300 executes a common first half suggestion effect that has the same contents when the player visually recognizes the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect according to the first modification. The common first half suggestion effect may be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A (B). According to such an aspect, since the effect control device 300 can use common data when performing the first half suggestion effect in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, the effect time of the first pattern effect is extended. This can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39 (B), the timing of the suggestion effect according to the second modification of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the second modification of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestion effect (genuine) in the same manner as the first pattern effect according to the first modification, and the first half suggestion effect. After the production (genuine) is completed, the notice production is executed.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the second modification, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestion effect and the second half suggestion effect (gase) as the Gase pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is not performed thereafter.

Here, the effect control device 300 executes a common suggestion effect that has the same contents when the player visually recognizes the first half suggestion effect and the second half suggestion effect of the second pattern effect. According to such an aspect, the effect control device 300 can use common data for the first half suggestion effect and the second half suggestion effect when executing the second pattern effect, so that the data read immediately before is looped as it is. It can be used and the processing load can be further reduced. Further, in the genuine pattern production of the first pattern production, the advance notice production is performed after the first half suggestion production (genuine), so that the delay in the production time of the first pattern production is reduced as in the first modification. it can.

In addition, by combining the first modification of FIG. 39 (A) and that of FIG. 39 (B), the first half suggestion effect common to the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect is executed, and the first half of the second pattern effect is executed. A common suggestion effect may be executed between the suggestion effect and the latter half suggestion effect. According to such an aspect, the effect control device 300 uses common data for the first half suggestion effect of the first pattern effect, the first half suggestion effect of the second pattern effect, and the second half suggestion effect of the second pattern effect. Since it can be done, the processing load can be greatly reduced.

[Third modification example of the timing chart when executing the suggestion effect]
FIG. 40 is a third modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect.

In the third modification, the effect control device 300 executes the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect as in the first modification and the second modification, and in addition, performs a plurality of suggestion effects in the latter half. It is possible to execute the third pattern effect divided into.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the first half suggestion effect, and then sequentially executes the second half suggestion effect, for example, by dividing the latter half suggestion effect into, for example, the rear 1 suggestion (gase) and the rear 2 suggestion (reversal).

After the second half suggestion effect, the first suggestion (gase) is a suggestion effect that makes the player think that the subsequent advance notice effect is not performed, and is a part of the second half suggestion effect (gase) of the second pattern effect. It may be a suggestion effect common to.

In addition, the second suggestion (reversal) after the second half suggestion is a reversal effect performed after the first suggestion (gase), suggesting that the Gase pattern effect and the advance notice effect are performed after reminding the player once. It is a kind of genuine pattern production.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes a reverse effect of the rear 1 suggestion (gase) followed by the rear 2 suggestion (reversal). Therefore, the player who thought that the notice production will not be performed by the Gase pattern production of the latter 1 suggestion (Gase) will be given a positive surprise that the notice production will be performed, so the interest of the game Can be improved.

The effect control device 300 divides the latter half suggestion effect of the third pattern effect into two (after 1 suggestion and after 2 suggestion), but the effect control device 300 may divide the third pattern effect into three or more to perform the second half suggestion effect. ..

[Fourth modification of the timing chart when executing the suggestion effect]
FIG. 41 is a fourth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect.

In the fourth modification, the effect control device 300 can execute the first to third pattern effects having different execution times of the suggestion effect.

In the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can execute the first suggestion effect (first suggestion) as the authentic pattern effect, and then sequentially execute the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the like, and the subsequent stop result of the variable display game. Can be a big hit (special result). At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the first suggestion effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the second suggestion effect.

Further, in the second pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can, for example, execute the second suggestion effect (second suggestion) as the Gase pattern effect, and then deviate from the stop result of the variable display game. At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the second suggestion effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the third suggestion effect.

Further, in the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can execute, for example, the third suggestion effect (third suggestion) as the authentic pattern effect, and then sequentially execute the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the like. The stop result can be a big hit (special result). The third suggestion effect has a longer execution time than the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 of the fourth modification plays a variable display game so that the variable times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect on which the advance notice effect is executed are the same time. Further, the variation time of the second pattern effect in which the advance notice effect is not executed is shorter than the variation time of the first and third pattern effects. Therefore, since the fluctuation time of the first pattern production and the third pattern production is the same time, the total fluctuation time of the third pattern production is long even if the execution time of the third suggestion effect in the third pattern production is long. It is possible to reduce the delay and improve the interest of the game. In addition, the variable display game can be terminated earlier when the second pattern effect is selected, in which the Gase pattern effect is performed, as compared with the case where the first pattern effect or the second pattern effect in which the genuine pattern effect is performed is selected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production that does not raise the expectation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Therefore, the execution time of the third suggestion effect (third suggestion), which is the authentic pattern effect of the third pattern effect, is longer than the execution time of the second suggestion effect (second suggestion), which is the Gase pattern effect of the second pattern effect. become longer. On the other hand, since the advance notice effect of the third pattern effect is shorter than the advance notice effect of the first pattern effect, the variation time of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect is the same time.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 performs the suggestion effect by making the execution time of the third suggestion effect, which is the authentic pattern effect, longer than the execution time of the second suggestion effect, which is the Gase pattern effect. It is possible to further increase the player's expectation that the notice production with a high expectation of a big hit will be executed after that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the effect control device 300 can execute the third pattern effect at the same time as the first pattern effect without extending the overall fluctuation time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first to third suggestion effects are set at the same start timing, and are executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 41, but may be performed at the start of the fluctuation. .. The reach production is not limited to reach production such as SP1 to 3 reach and premium reach, for example, after performing look-ahead notice, pseudo continuous production, continuous notice (chance eye notice), step-up notice, and counting a predetermined number of seconds. A timer notice (countdown notice, x-second notice) or the like for giving a notice may be included.

Further, the effect control device 300 uses the first half of the suggested effects in the first to third suggested effects as a common mode as described above so that the processing load when executing the first to third suggested effects is reduced. , Each suggestion effect can also be executed.

[Fifth modification example of the timing chart when executing the suggestion effect]
FIG. 42 is a fifth modification of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 42, the suggestion effect executed by the effect control device 300 can also be applied to a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo-ream). The effect control device 300 tentatively simulates the decorative special symbols (decorative first symbols A to C) that are variablely displayed between the start and the end of one variable display game (special figure variable display game). It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect in which a pseudo-variation (single effect, sub-effect, sub-variation) to be stopped and displayed (pseudo-stop display) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 42, the effect control device 300 executes a suggestion effect (genuine) as a genuine pattern effect at the time of the first pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect. The effect control device 300 can suggest, for example, that the second and subsequent pseudo-variations succeed and continue in the suggestion effect (genuine).

Then, in the advance notice effect executed after the suggestion effect (genuine), the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a character (for example, "ream") indicating that the pseudo-variation is successful and continues on the special symbol C to give a notice. Can be produced. In the advance notice effect, the effect control device 300 may display characters indicating that the pseudo-variation is successful and continue on the special symbols A and B, and by displaying characters and figures other than "ream". A notice effect may be executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a suggestion effect (gase) as a Gase pattern effect at the time of the second pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect. The effect control device 300 can suggest, for example, that the pseudo-variation after the third time succeeds and does not continue (ends in failure) by the suggestion effect (gase). The suggestion effect (gase) may be divided into a first half suggestion effect and a second half suggestion effect, and a common suggestion effect may be repeated so as to reduce the processing load.

Then, after suggesting that the pseudo-variation ends (fails) without continuing the pseudo-variation during the suggestion effect (gase) (for example, at the end of the suggestion effect), the effect control device 300 deviates from the variation display game. It can be stopped in a mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the pseudo fluctuations of a plurality of times (for example, the first and second times) executed by the effect control device 300 have the same time regardless of whether the true pattern effect is successful or the Gase pattern effect is unsuccessful. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production time of either the success or the failure of the pseudo-variation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game, special figure variable display game) and an effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game-related effect. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). As suggestion effects, the effect control means includes a first suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, suggestion effect (genuine)) in which a predetermined advance notice effect is executed after execution, and a second suggestion effect in which the predetermined advance notice effect is not executed after execution (genuine pattern effect, suggestion effect (genuine)) At least one of the Gase pattern effect and the suggestion effect (Gase) can be selected and executed, and the second suggestion effect selects the execution time of the suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect is selected. It should be shorter than the execution time when it is done.

According to such a game machine 10, the effect control means has a first suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, suggestion) so that the execution time is shorter than that of the second suggestion effect (gase pattern effect, suggestion effect (gase)). Directing (genuine)). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production time when the first suggestion effect and the subsequent advance notice effect are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the first suggestion effect is completed relatively early as compared with the second suggestion effect, and the player can easily pay attention to the advance notice effect to be executed after that, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is the game time (variable time) of the game when the second suggestion effect (gase pattern effect, suggestion effect (gase)) is selected. The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the first suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, suggestion effect (genuine)) is selected is lengthened. According to such a game machine 10, the advance notice production is performed in the first pattern production including the first suggestion effect and having a relatively high expectation (reliability) of the big hit, as compared with the second pattern effect including the second suggestion effect. Since the time to perform can be secured, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased by the advance notice effect, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are effects having the same start timing and a common mode (first half suggestion effect). Since the effect control device 300 can use common data when performing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time of the first suggestion effect and reduce the processing load. Can be done.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a first suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, first suggestion) in which a predetermined advance notice effect is executed after execution as a suggestion effect. And the third suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, third suggestion) and the second suggestion effect (gase pattern effect, second suggestion) in which the predetermined advance notice effect is not executed after the execution is selected. It is feasible. Further, the effect control means shortens the execution time of the suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect is selected to be shorter than the execution time when the second suggestion effect is selected, and the second suggestion effect is selected. The execution time of the suggestion effect in the case is made shorter than the execution time when the third suggestion effect is selected.

According to such a game machine 10, the execution time of the third suggestion effect, which is the authentic pattern effect, is set longer than the execution time of the second suggestion effect, which is the Gase pattern effect, and the suggestion effect is performed. It is possible to further raise the expectation of the player that a high-level advance notice effect will be executed after that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the effect control means can execute the third suggestion effect at the same time as the first suggestion effect without delaying the entire fluctuation time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) has a first suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect,) rather than a game time (variable time) when the second suggestion effect (gase pattern effect, second suggestion) is selected. When the first suggestion) or the third suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, third suggestion) is selected, the game time (variation time) of the game is lengthened. According to such a game machine 10, also, when the second suggestion effect which is a Gase pattern effect is selected as compared with the case where the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect which are genuine pattern effects are selected. Since the game can be ended early, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production that does not raise the expectations of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a game time (variable time) of the game when the first suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, first suggestion) is selected, and a third suggestion effect (genuine pattern effect, first suggestion). The game time (variable time) of the game when 3 suggestion) is selected is set to the same length. According to such a game machine 10, the game time of the game when the first suggestion effect is selected and when the third suggestion effect is selected is the same time, so that the execution time of the third suggestion effect is long. Even if this happens, it is possible to reduce the delay in the overall fluctuation time and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect have the same start timing and have a common aspect. According to such a game machine 10, the above-mentioned effect can be obtained and the processing load of the suggestion effect can be reduced.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 59. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a perspective view of the game board 30. FIG. 46 is an enlarged view of the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 45. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is characterized in that the rotating body unit 800 (winning stabilizing means, guiding means) described later is arranged in the gaming machine 10 of the first and second embodiments.

In the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, the game area 32 is provided in the area surrounded by the guide rails 31, and the center case 40 is attached to the substantially center of the game area 32. A display device 41 is attached behind the central window of the center case 40.

An upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) is provided on the upper portion of the center case 40, a lamp display device 80 is provided on the left side portion, and a side effect unit 40d is provided on the right side portion.

A starting winning opening 36 (winning area) is arranged in the lower center of the game area 32, and a normal variable winning device 37 (movable member 37b) (winning area) is provided on the right side and slightly higher position thereof, and further on the upper right side thereof. The starting gate 34 (winning area) is arranged in the building. Further, a special variable winning device 39 (opening / closing door 39c) is arranged at a position above the starting gate 34 in the game area 32.

In the first embodiment, a tube-shaped warp passage 40e (first intake passage) having an inflow port 40a communicating with a position substantially central in the height direction on the left side of the game area 32 and a warp passage 40e. It has a configuration including a stage portion 40b that receives the game ball that has been rolled from the ground and causes the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 that includes the start winning opening 36.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the rotating body unit 800 (guidance means) is provided on the back side (rear side) of the stage portion 40b. Further, the lower end of the warp passage 40e (guidance means) is connected to the rotating body unit 800, and the game ball that has rolled the warp passage 40e is supplied to the upper surface of the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810). The rotating body unit 800 may be provided with a structure that engages with the stage portion 40b by a groove or the like, or may be formed integrally with the stage portion 40b. Further, the display device 41 is arranged behind the rotating body unit 800.

In the vicinity of the inflow port 40a on the left side of the game area 32, an obstacle nail (not shown) so that 80-90% of the game balls (game balls by left-handed hit) flowing down to the left side in the game area 32 flow down to the inflow port 40a. ) Is planted.

[Basic configuration of rotating body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the rotating body unit 800 includes a rotating stage 810 on which the game ball rolls, and a tray portion 801 that surrounds the circumference of the rotating stage 810. It is tilted downward toward the game area 32 (for example, the tilt angle is about 5 degrees). As a result, the rotating body unit 800 can flow the game ball toward the game area 32 including the start winning opening 36.

The tray portion 801 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped rolling surface 802 (bottom surface) on which the game ball rolls, and wall portions 803A, 803B, 803C arranged on the outer edge of the rolling surface 802. The wall portion 803A is a member that rises from the edge of the rolling surface 802 on the display device 41 side and extends in the width direction (left-right direction of the game machine 10), and the wall portion 803B rises from the left edge of the rolling surface 802. It is a member that extends in the depth direction (the front-rear direction of the game machine 10), and the wall portion 803C is a member that rises from the right edge of the rolling surface 802 and extends in the depth direction.

One end of the tray portion 801 is arranged on the stage portion 40b with the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b exposed. Since the rolling surface 802 has an edge facing the game area 32 side open and is inclined downward toward the game area 32 side as described above, the game ball supplied to the rolling surface 802 rolls. It flows down from the edge of the surface 802 on the game region 32 side toward the game region 32 via the downstream portion (stage portion 40b1 and stage portion 40b2) of the stage portion 40b.

A part of the wall portion 803B facing the warp passage 40e is opened, and the lower end of the warp passage 40e is connected to the opened portion. Further, the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 is provided with a protrusion shape extending from a position adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 40e toward the rotation stage 810, and a guide rib for guiding the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotation stage 810. 804 is formed. The guide rib 804 guides the game ball in a direction between the width direction of the tray portion 801 and the center direction (front-back direction) of the rotation stage 810 from the position on the wall portion 803A side of the rotation axis of the rotation stage 810. It is formed. When the warp passage 40e is arranged so that the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e directly faces the rotation stage 810 as described above, the guide rib 804 may be omitted.

The wall portion 803B and the wall portion 803C extend from the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. Further, an extension portion 806, which will be described later, extends from the central portion of the edge. Therefore, the stage portion 40b is divided into a stage portion 40b1 partitioned by the left wall portion 803B and the extension portion 806, and a stage portion 40b2 partitioned by the right wall portion 803C and the extension portion 806.

The rotating stage 810 is a rotating body having a cylindrical shape and rotating around a cylindrical axis, and its upper surface is a rolling surface 811 on which a game ball rolls. As described above, the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810 is also inclined downward toward the game area 32.

Further, the rotary stage 810 is rotated by the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50), and the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50) is driven / stopped by the game control device 100 (FIG. 50), and the rotation speed (rotation direction). (Including switching) is controlled. The rotation stage 810 normally rotates counterclockwise, but may rotate clockwise (counterclockwise) as described later.

Notches 812 (holding portions) are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the peripheral edge of the rotating stage 810. In this embodiment, five notch portions 812 are formed (the number of cutout portions 812 is arbitrary), and the upper surface and the side surface of the rotary stage 810 are formed so as to be open, respectively. The cutout portion 812 is formed so that the game ball can be arranged inside in a plan view (top view), and the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotation stage 810 may enter the cutout portion 812. It is a possible configuration.

Here, the tray portion 801 is provided with an accommodating portion 805 having an inner wall that imitates the side surface of the rotating stage 810, and the rotating stage 810 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 805. Therefore, since the cutout portion 812 faces the inner wall of the accommodating portion 805, the portion of the notch portion 812 opened on the side surface side of the rotation stage 810 is closed by the inner wall of the accommodating portion 805. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the notch portion 812 is held by the inner walls of the notch portion 812 and the accommodating portion 805.

It is preferable that the depth of the cutout portion 812 is deeper than the radius of the game ball and shallower than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball held by the cutout portion 812 is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed by colliding the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotation stage 810 with the game ball held by the notch portion 812. Further, since the depth of the notch portion 812 is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held by the notch portion 812 collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 from the notch portion 812. It is possible to reduce being kicked out.

By the way, the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810 is higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 (so that the rotating stage 810 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801). It may be arranged. At this time, a step is formed between the rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801, but it is preferable to form the step so as to be smaller than the radius of the game ball.

In this case, the game ball supplied from the warp passage 40e overcomes the step and moves to the rolling surface 811 of the rotation stage 810, but when overcoming, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed irregularly. In addition, some game balls may stay in front of the step without overcoming the step, but when the notch portion 812 comes to a position facing the game ball, the game is played in the notch portion 812. It is also possible to allow the game ball staying on the condition that the ball is not held to enter the cutout portion 812.

The extension portion 806 extends from a position which is the central portion of the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side and is directly above the start winning opening 36 when viewed from the front of the game machine 10. Further, the extension portion 806 and the tray portion 801 linearly penetrate from the tip of the extension portion 806 on the start winning opening 36 side to the inner wall of the accommodating portion 805, and rotate with the open portion of the tip of the extension portion 806. An induction groove 807 that communicates with the side surface of the stage 810 is formed. The guide groove 807 sequentially faces the notch 812 as the rotation stage 810 rotates.

Here, the extending portion 806 forms the same plane as the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 but is higher than the rolling surface 802 (the extending portion 806 forms the same plane as the rolling surface 802). It may be formed (so that 806 intersects). Further, the portion of the tray portion 801 adjacent to the guide groove 807 may also be formed so as to be higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 as in the extension portion 806.

The bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is inclined downward toward the starting winning opening 36. Further, the width of the guide groove 807 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. The bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is arranged so as not to form a step that is convex when viewed from the bottom surface of the notch portion 812. On the other hand, the bottom surface of the notch portion 812 is inclined downward toward the game area 32 side like the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801. Therefore, when the notch portion 812 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the notch portion 812 is introduced into the guide groove 807, and the game ball is introduced from the tip of the guide groove 807 (extending portion 806) to the starting winning opening 36. Can flow down toward.

Further, a sluice valve 820 (first valve) is arranged at a position serving as an inlet of the game ball of the guide groove 807. The sluice valve 820 can be driven in the height direction (normal direction of the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801) by the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50), and the sluice valve 820 is in a state where the inlet of the guide groove 807 is closed. Switching control is performed to a state in which the entrance is open. The sluice valve 820 is urged by an urging means (spring or the like) in the direction of closing the guide groove 807, but when the valve solenoid 144 is driven, the sluice valve 820 is pulled out from the guide groove 807 (downward). When the induction groove 807 is opened by force and the drive of the valve solenoid 144 is stopped, the sluice valve 820 is urged in the direction of entering the induction groove 807 (upward direction) by the urging force by the urging means to close the induction groove 807. .. The valve solenoid 144 is controlled by the game control device 100 so as to open the inlet at the timing when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807 (and in most cases when the timing occurs).

The distance between the main surface of the sluice valve 820 on the game area 32 side and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side is preferably shorter than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the sluice valve 820 is closed, the game ball that rolls in the direction of entering the guide groove 807 from the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 abuts on the sluice valve 820 and rebounds to the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b2. Since it flows down, it is possible to limit the game ball from entering the guide groove 807.

Further, when the sluice valve 820 is closed, the height of the sluice valve 820 is higher than the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 (the sluice valve 820 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810). ) Is preferable. As a result, when the cutout portion 812 is not opposed to the guide groove 807, the sluice valve 820 blocks the game ball that rolls in the direction directly from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 toward the guide groove 807. Since the rolling direction of the ball is changed, it is possible to limit the game ball not held in the notch 812 from directly entering the guide groove 807.

When the game ball is constantly supplied to the rotation stage 810, the game ball is held in all the notches 812 of the rotation stage 810, and the rotation stage 810 is rotating at a constant rotation speed, the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807). ), Most of the game balls that flow down from) win the starting winning opening 36, so that the frequency of winning is almost constant. Therefore, when the game balls that win the starting winning opening 36 are only those that have flowed down from the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807), the start value S of the game machine 10 depends on the rotation speed of the rotation stage 810, but is constant. It becomes. In the present embodiment, the start value S is the number of executions per predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state (when hitting left), that is, the game ball wins in the start winning opening 36. It is the number of times per predetermined period.

By the way, in the rotating body unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the extension portion 806 (induction groove 807), the game ball flowing down from the stage portion 40b1, and the game ball flowing down from the stage portion 40b2 include the start winning opening 36. It flows down toward the game area 32 to be played.

Here, the distance between the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) (and the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2) and the starting winning opening 36 in the height direction is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the central portion of the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2 has a concave shape inclined toward the game area 32 side.

Therefore, for example, when the game ball flows down from the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2 in a manner of rolling from the outside in the left-right direction of the concave shape toward the center (extending portion 806 side), the game ball enters the starting winning opening 36. There is a high possibility that it will flow down toward you. Therefore, most of the game balls that have flowed down from the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807) win the starting prize opening 36, but the game balls collide with the game balls that have flowed down from the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b2 to win the starting prize. Winning the mouth 36 may be hindered.

Further, the game ball flowing down from the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b2 may win a prize in the start winning opening 36 without colliding with the game ball flowing down from the extension portion 806 (induction groove 807).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, road nails (not shown) are planted in a row in the direction toward the starting winning opening 36 from a position below the wind turbine in the game area 32. A game ball that has flowed down in accordance with the above may win a prize in the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the rotating body unit 800 collides with the game ball that has flowed down the game area 32 (road nail, etc.) without passing through the rotating body unit 800, and the winning of the starting winning opening 36 is hindered. In some cases.

In some cases, the game ball flowing down the road nail jumps and rides on the rotating stage 810 or the tray portion 801.

As described above, the game ball that has flowed down from the extension portion 806 (induction groove 807), the game ball that has flowed down from the stage portion 40b1, the game ball that has flowed down from the stage portion 40b2, and the rotating body unit 800 have not been passed through. When the game ball flowing down the game area 32 interferes (collides) with each other in the vicinity of the start winning opening 36, the frequency of winning the game ball into the starting winning opening 36, that is, the start value S is varied to some extent. become. Of course, it is also possible to configure all the game balls that have flowed down from the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807) to win the starting winning opening 36. In this case, for example, a game in which obstacle nails are appropriately arranged on both sides in the width direction of the path from the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807) to the start winning opening 36, and the nails flow down from other than the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807). The ball may not collide with the game ball that has flowed down from the extension portion 806 (guide groove 807).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the start value S can be stabilized, but it is difficult to predict the rolling of the game ball in the rotating body unit 800 and the flow destination of the game ball flowing down from the rotating body unit 800. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the rolling and flowing state of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body unit 800 is described on the premise that the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the starting winning opening 36, but other winning areas such as the normal drawing starting gate 34 and the general winning are won. The game ball may be configured to flow down toward any of the mouth 35, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39.

[Behavior of the game ball in the rotating body unit]
FIG. 47 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 800 (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44), and is a diagram (No. 1) showing a state of a game ball in the rotating body unit 800. FIG. 48 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 800 (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44), and is a diagram (No. 2) showing a state of a game ball in the rotating body unit 800. FIG. 49 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 800 (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44), and is a diagram (No. 3) showing a state of a game ball in the rotating body unit 800.

The behavior of the game ball supplied to the rotating body unit 800 will be examined. As shown in FIG. 47, the game ball is held in at least one of the five notch portions 812, and the guide groove 807 does not face the notch portion 812, and the inlet of the guide groove 807 is a sluice valve. Consider the case where the game ball flows down from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) to the rotary stage 810 when the 820 is closed.

In this case, since the rolling direction changes irregularly when the game ball rides on the rotation stage 810 as described above, the game ball directly fills the empty notch 812 as shown in [1] in FIG. 47. When entering, or as shown in [2] in FIG. 47, the game ball passes between the empty notches 812, flows down from the rotary stage 810, and collides with the wall portion 803C of the tray portion 801. It is conceivable that the game flows down to the stage portion 40b2 and then flows down to the game area 32.

Further, as shown in [3] in FIG. 47, when the game ball rolls on the rotation stage 810 in the same manner as in [1], but the game ball is already held in the notch 812 beyond the game ball. It is also conceivable that the rolling game ball collides with the held game ball, the rolling direction changes, and the ball enters another notch 812. In any case, the game ball that has flowed down to the rotary stage 810 finally flows down toward the game area 32, but on the way, the game ball or the wall portion 803A, 803B, 803C held in the notch portion 812. The rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801 can roll in all directions by colliding with or the like.

Further, as shown in [4] in FIG. 47, there is also a game ball that rolls toward the extension portion 806 (induction groove 807) in the tray portion 801 (rolling surface 802). In this case, when the game ball exceeds the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game region 32 side, it begins to fall so as to intersect the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 and then falls on the side surface of the extension portion 806. Most of the game balls will collide and fall on the stage portion 40b1. The game ball that has fallen on the stage portion 40b1 (stage portion 40b2) falls toward the game area 32 (or the start winning opening 36).

Further, there may be a game ball that rolls in the direction of reaching the guide groove 807 before crossing the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. However, by designing the main surface of the sluice valve 820 on the game area 32 side and the edge and the distance of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side to be smaller than the radius of the game ball, the game ball becomes the sluice valve 820. Most of the game balls will collide and flow down to the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2.

Further, there is a game ball that rolls from the rotary stage 810 toward the guide groove 807, but when the height of the sluice valve 820 is higher than the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810, most of the game balls are partitioned. It is prevented from colliding with the valve 820 and entering the guide groove 807.

As described above, when the sluice valve 820 closes the inlet of the guide groove 807, the game ball hardly enters the guide groove 807.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball is held in at least one of the five notch portions 812, and the sluice valve 820 is at the timing when the guide groove 807 faces the notch portion 812 holding the game ball. Consider a case where the game ball flows down to the rotary stage 810 from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) when the entrance of the guide groove 807 is open.

By opening the sluice valve 820 at the timing when the notch 812 holding the game ball facing the guide groove 807 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the notch 812 is released to the guide groove 807. It can flow down toward the starting winning opening 36 via.

For example, when the cycle of one rotation of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the sluice valve 820 is opened every 8 seconds, and the sluice valve 820 is opened at the timing when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807. , The game ball held in the notch portion 812 can be substantially flowed down into the guide groove 807 every 8 seconds. At this time, when the game balls are held in all the cutout portions 512, after the first game ball flows down toward the start winning opening 36, all the remaining game balls are directed toward the starting winning opening 36. It takes 32 seconds to flow down. It takes a predetermined time for the notch portion 812 to receive the game ball from the warp passage 40e and then let it flow down into the guide groove 807. Considering the case where the game ball directly enters the notch 812 [2] from the guide rib 804 at the time of arrangement shown in FIG. 48, the predetermined time is 16 seconds when the rotation stage 810 is counterclockwise (in the case of one lap delay). 56 seconds), and 24 seconds in the clockwise case (64 seconds in the case of one lap delay). Here, if the winning of the starting winning opening 36 from other than the guide groove 807 is negligible, the starting value S in this case is 7.5 times / minute. Further, in order to set the start value S to 7.5 times / minute, one or more game balls per 8 seconds, that is, 7.5 or more game balls per minute (more than the number corresponding to the start value S) are warped. It is supplied from 40e to the rotary stage 810.

Further, for example, consider a case where the sluice valve 820 is opened every 3 seconds, and the sluice valve 820 is opened at a timing when any of the notch portions 812 faces the induction groove 807 in the initial state. In the initial state, the game ball held in the notch 812 [1] can flow down into the guide groove 807. After that, the cutout portion 812 [2] is cut at every product (24 seconds) of [opening cycle of the sluice valve 820 (3 seconds)] and [opposing cycle of the cutout portion 812 with the guide groove 807 (8 seconds)]. The game balls held in the notch 812 [3], the notch 812 [4], and the notch 812 [5] can almost flow down into the guide groove 807 in this order. At this time, when the game balls are held in all the cutout portions 512, after the first game ball flows down toward the start winning opening 36, all the remaining game balls are directed toward the starting winning opening 36. It takes 96 seconds to flow down. In this case, since the number of winnings per minute from the guide groove 807 to the starting winning opening 36 is reduced, in order to increase the starting value S, the starting winning opening 36 from other than the guiding groove 807 should be won. increase.

On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down to the rotary stage 810 enters the empty notch portion 812 as shown in [6], the game ball (or the wall portion 803A) held in the notch portion 812 as shown in [7]. , 803B, 803C), change the rolling direction, and flow down to the stage portion 40b1 (or the stage portion 40b2).

As shown in FIG. 49, when the sluice valve 820 opens the inlet of the guide groove 807 at the timing when the guide groove 807 faces the notch portion 812 that does not hold the game ball, the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) is used. Consider the case where the game ball flows down to the rotary stage 810.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball that rolls on the tray portion 801 collides with the wall portion 803C and returns to the rotation stage 810 to guide the game ball once it has come out of the rotation stage 810. It may enter the 807, or it may enter the notch 812 facing the cutout portion 812 and enter the guide groove 807. In this way, even if the game ball is once ejected from the rotating stage 810, there is a possibility that the winning of the starting winning opening 36 can be re-challenged. In particular, the smaller the number of game balls held in the notch 812, the higher the possibility of winning the starting winning opening 36 by re-challenge. As described above, there is a possibility of entering the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch portion 812 and winning a prize in the start winning opening 36, and a game ball flowing down the stage portions 40b1 and 40b2 can win a prize in the starting winning opening 36. Since it is also sexual, even if the game ball is held in all the cutouts 812, the value of performing the above re-challenge is not lost.

Further, as described above, considering the case where the sluice valve 820 is opened every 8 seconds and the case where the sluice valve 820 is opened every 3 seconds, the frequency of opening is higher when the sluice valve 820 is opened every 3 seconds. There is a high possibility that the guide groove 807 will enter the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch 812 facing the 807. However, by shortening the opening time of the sluice valve 820 (for example, 0.3 seconds), it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of these.

The rotation stage 810 rotates counterclockwise at a constant rotation speed, for example, but can be controlled to rotate in the reverse direction for a short time at a predetermined timing. As a result, for example, when a game ball is accumulated between the guide rib 804 and the rotary stage 810, it can be taken out. Further, the rotation stage 810 may be rotated in the reverse direction at a minute rotation angle and then rotated in the forward direction at the stage where the notch portion 812 faces the guide groove 807 and then the rotation is slightly advanced. As a result, even when the game ball is bitten between the notch portion 812 and the tray portion 801, this can be eliminated. Of course, when the notch 812 faces the guide groove 807, the rotation of the rotation stage 810 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so that the game ball can surely flow down into the guide groove 807. May be good.

Further, in FIGS. 45-49, the cutout portions 812 are arranged so as to be evenly spaced in the circumferential direction of the rotation stage 810, but may be arranged so as to be non-uniform. In this case, for example, an encoder (not shown) is attached to the rotary stage 810, and a sluice valve is used each time the encoder (not shown) detects a predetermined rotation angle when any of the notch portions 812 faces the guide groove 807. The 820 may be configured to operate in an open manner.

In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the sluice valve 820 is not used is also suitable. For example, a fixed stage (not shown) having substantially the same dimensions in the plane direction is arranged under the rotary stage 810, and a plurality of first through holes (larger than the diameter of the game ball) are arranged in the rotary stage 810 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. (Has a diameter) is formed, and one second through hole is formed at a position facing any of the first through holes of the fixed stage. Further, a second tray portion (not shown, similar to the tray portion 801) is formed under the fixed stage (tray portion 801), and the second tray portion is a second extension portion (not shown, extension portion 806). The same as above), and the game ball can flow down from the tip of the second extension portion toward the starting winning opening 36. Then, when the game ball flows down to the rotary stage 810, the game ball enters and is held in the first through hole, and when any one of the first through holes communicates with the second through hole, it is held in the first through hole. The game ball can flow down toward the start winning opening 36 through the second through hole, the second tray portion, and the second extension portion. In this case, the cycle in which the game ball can flow from the second extending portion toward the starting winning opening 36 is a value obtained by dividing [the cycle of the rotation stage 810] by [the number of first through holes].

Alternatively, instead of the fixed stage, a movable stage (not shown) that has almost the same dimensions in the plane direction as the rotating stage 810 and moves in the axial direction is arranged under the rotating stage 810, and when a predetermined time elapses, the movable stage becomes a game ball. By moving away from the rotary stage 810 at a distance longer than the diameter of, all the game balls held in the first through hole are supplied to the second tray section, and the movable stage is returned to the original position and is in the second tray section. All the game balls may be made to flow down toward the starting winning opening 36.

In the present invention, the guiding means is premised on the rotating body unit 800, but as another configuration, the first stage (not shown) for receiving the game ball flowing down the warp passage 40e and the first stage directly below the first stage are arranged. A stage provided with a second stage (not shown, arranged at the same position as the tray portion 801) is also applicable.

The first stage is formed of, for example, a transparent member (it does not have to be transparent), and is provided with a drop mechanism at the center of the first stage, which drops the game ball toward the second stage and irregularly changes the drop timing. ing. The drop mechanism has an obtuse-angled (slowly inclined) tapered inner wall that allows the game ball to roll and whose diameter decreases as it goes down, and has a first through hole at the lower end through which the game ball can pass. , Is equipped.

The second stage is equipped with a plurality of branching paths that branch radially around the position directly below the drop mechanism, and one of the branching paths is arranged so that the game ball can be almost won at the starting winning opening. The remaining branch path allows the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely toward the start winning opening 36).

A movable part (rotational motion or swing motion is possible) is arranged at the branch position of the branch path (the position directly below the drop mechanism). The movable portion has, for example, a gently inclined conical shape having a direction along the normal of the second stage as a rotation axis and having the rotation axis as an apex, and has a radial concavo-convex shape centered on the apex. A plurality of recesses formed by the uneven shape serve as a guide for temporarily holding the game ball and guiding it to the branch path.

Since the game ball that has flowed down from the warp passage 40e to the first stage can enter the falling mechanism from any direction, the number of times (or the number of times of reciprocating) the inner wall of the falling mechanism is different, and so on. The route to reach changes irregularly for each game ball. Therefore, the falling timing of the game ball that has flowed down to the falling mechanism changes irregularly.

Since the game ball that has fallen from the first through hole falls near the apex of the movable part, the direction in which it rolls from the apex of the movable part becomes irregular, and the guided direction is also the fall timing of the game ball. It changes depending on the rotation direction, the rotation speed of the movable part, the phase (direction of the recess), and the like. Therefore, the branch path to which the game ball flows down also changes irregularly for each game ball.

However, since the number of branch paths is finite, the number of flow paths of the game ball is smaller than the number of flow paths of the game ball that flows down only in the game area where the windmill or the obstacle nail is arranged. Therefore, the frequency (probability density) at which a certain number of game balls can be won in the start winning opening 36 within a predetermined time is higher than that of the conventional game machine, and thus the start value S is also stable.

In addition, it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball falls from the falling mechanism and how the game ball is distributed to the branch path by the movable part and can win a prize at the start winning opening, which makes the player interested in the movement of the game ball. This can enhance the interest of the game.

As another configuration, the guide groove 807 may be provided under the second stage (without branch flow path). At this time, at least one of the concave portions forming the concave-convex shape of the movable portion is a slit (notch) through which the game ball can penetrate. A second through hole through which the game ball can penetrate is formed at a position directly below the movable portion of the second stage, and the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other at a predetermined angle with the slit. Further, the game ball that has flowed down the second through hole flows down into the guide groove 807.

Then, when the game ball that has fallen from the drop mechanism flows down into the slit at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other, the game ball that has flowed down into the slit flows down into the guide groove 807 through the second through hole and wins a start prize. It flows down toward the mouth 36. The game ball that did not flow down into the second through hole in the second stage flows down toward the game area 32 (rarely, the start winning opening 36) via the second stage (stage portion 40b1 or stage portion 40b2). You may.

Here, the slit and the second through hole may be formed so as to have a width and a diameter larger than those of the concave portion forming the concave-convex shape of the movable portion.

Further, the warp passage 40e is branched by using a sorting device 850 or the like described later, one is allocated to the first stage by the warp passage 40e and flows down, and the other is allowed to flow down to the branch passage toward the second through hole. It may be. A movable part is interposed between the lower end of the branch passage and the second through hole, but if the game ball flows down from the branch passage at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other, the game ball will move. It may flow down into the second through hole, and at other timings, it may flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely, the start winning opening 36) via the second stage (stage portion 40b1 or stage portion 40b2).

Further, instead of the rotating body unit 800, a swinging member having a groove on which the game ball can roll may be used. The swing member swings (vibrates, swings) around an axis in the substantially vertical direction at a predetermined cycle, and one end of the groove faces the lower end (or guide rib 804) of the warp passage 40e every half cycle. The other end of the groove swings (vibrates) so as to face the guide groove 807. The sluice valve 820 may not be provided. If the groove and the guide groove 807 are provided with a certain width, the game ball can be made to win the start winning opening 36 on a regular basis (every half cycle described above) even with such a configuration, and the start value S. Can be stabilized.

[Control system]
FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the game control device 100 can control the drive / stop of the rotary stage motor 143 that rotates the rotary stage 810 and the valve solenoid 144 that drives the sluice valve 820. That is, the game microcomputer 111 constituting the game control device 100 transmits a control signal regarding the rotation speed (including rotation in the reverse direction) of the rotation stage 810 via the data bus 140, the output port 141, and the fifth driver 138e to the rotation stage. It can be transmitted to the motor 143. Similarly, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit a timing signal to the valve solenoid 144 of the sluice valve 820 at the timing of opening the sluice valve 820. The control signal is a signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 at a predetermined cycle (for example, the above 40 seconds). The timing signal is a signal for driving the sluice valve 820 at predetermined time intervals (for example, the above 8 seconds and 3 seconds).

The game control device 100 is provided with a first proximity switch 72a, a second proximity switch 72b (third detection means), and a third proximity switch 72c (first proximity switch 72c), which will be described later, via the proximity I / F 121 and the input ports 124 and 126. The detection signals transmitted from the detection means) and the fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means) are input respectively. Further, the game control device 100 can transmit drive signals to the valve solenoid 144, the valve solenoid 145, and the valve solenoid 146, which will be described later, via the output port 141 and the fifth driver 138e, respectively.

For example, when the touch switch signal is input from the operation handle 24 (or when the drive of the ball launcher is detected), the game control device 100 rotates the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction (counterclockwise), and the control signal and timing. The transmission of the signal can be started.

Further, the game control device 100 releases the customer waiting state of the game machine 10 by inputting a signal for detecting a game ball such as a winning port switch 35a and a starting port 1 switch 36a instead of the touch switch signal. Then, the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction can be started.

Then, the game control device 100 stops the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal during the right-handed state (may be the left-handed state) such as the jackpot state, the time saving state, or the probability change state (excluding the latent probability change). When the right-handed state (or left-handed state) is completed, the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction can be resumed. As a result, the power consumption of the rotating stage 810 during right-handed striking is avoided, and when the number of holdings (starting memory number) is maximum in the right-handed state, the game ball held in the rotating stage 810 is uselessly started as a winning opening. It is possible to avoid entering 36.

Further, in the game control device 100, for example, when a latent probability change (may be another specific game state other than this) occurs, the latent probability change continues for a predetermined time (the latent probability change continues even after the lapse of the predetermined time), or the latency. The control signal is stopped (or the control signal is rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise)) until the probability change is completed, and the timing signal is stopped (the sluice valve 820 closes the inlet of the induction groove 807). After that, a control signal and a timing signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted. This makes it possible to suggest the occurrence of latent probability change to the player.

Then, as described above, in the state where the rotation stage 810 is rotating during the latent probability change occurrence period, for example, when the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37 detects a game ball, the rotation stage 810 is controlled to rotate. The signal may be stopped. When the latent probability change occurs, the rotation stage 810 may not suggest the latent probability change by transmitting a control signal and a timing signal for rotating the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction from the beginning.

Further, the game control device 100 can end the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal when the customer waiting state (FIG. 10, step A3212) is reached. As a result, it is possible to reduce the power consumption while waiting for customers. Of course, even while waiting for a customer, it is possible to transmit a control signal and a timing signal in the same manner as during a game.

The RAM 111c constituting the gaming microcomputer 111 stores information on the rotation speed and timing information associated with the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 as described above. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the control signal and the timing signal by appropriately selecting the rotation speed information and the timing information based on the state of the gaming machine 10.

The game microcomputer 111 can transmit a control signal and a timing signal in association with an effect control command transmitted to the effect control device 300, and rotates the rotation stage 810 in the forward direction or the reverse direction depending on the effect content. You can also do it.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure game process of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the movable body control process (step A2619) is executed after the symbol variation control process. In the movable body control process (step A2619), the game control device 100 determines the state of the game machine 10 (waiting for a customer, playing a game, hitting right, etc.), and outputs a control signal and a timing signal based on the state. Send.

The state of the game machine 10 can also be identified by various commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Therefore, it is also possible for the effect control device 300 to control the rotary stage motor 143 and the valve solenoid 144. The effect control device 300 can control the rotary stage motor 143 and the valve solenoid 144 as the board effect device 44. That is, the effect control device 300 can transmit the control signal and the timing signal based on various commands transmitted from the game control device 100. As a result, the game control device 100 does not transmit the control signal and the timing signal, so that the processing load of the game control device 100 can be reduced accordingly.

By the way, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36, the game control device 100 (and the effect control device 300) starts the variable display game on the display device 41. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44, 45, and 46, the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810) is visible to the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player pays attention to the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rotating stage 810 and the tray unit 801 and does not pay attention to the variable display game.

Therefore, it is preferable that the duration (that is, the fluctuation time) of the special figure variation display game is substantially the same as the cycle of flowing down from the rotation stage 810 (guidance groove 807) toward the start winning opening 36. As a result, the state in which the flow of the game ball from the rotation stage 810 starts at the end of the variation display game is repeated, so that the display device 41 displaying the special figure variation display game and the rotation unit can be alternately watched and rotated. You can avoid the situation where you only look at the unit.

For example, assuming that the cycle of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval for opening the sluice valve 820 is 8 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the notch 812 toward the start winning opening 36 is 8. Since it is seconds, it is preferable that the variable display game starts with the winning of the game ball and its duration is about 8 seconds. Further, assuming that the cycle of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval for opening the sluice valve 820 is 3 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the notch 812 toward the start winning opening 36 is 24. Since it is seconds, it is preferable that the variable display game starts with the winning of the game ball and its duration is about 24 seconds.

In addition to the above, the duration (variation time) of the special figure variation display game may be longer or shorter than the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the notch portion 812 toward the start winning opening 36. It may be longer than the period of the rotary stage 810. Further, the duration of the variable display game may be the same as the product of the [predetermined coefficient] and the [cycle of the rotation stage 810], or may be longer or shorter than that. Here, the [predetermined coefficient] is "N" = 4 when the timer interrupt period of the CPU 11a (FIG. 50) is Nms = 4ms, or the opening time Mms = 100ms in a small hit of the special variation winning device 39 or the like. If, "M" = 100 can be used.

Further, a first proximity switch 72a (FIGS. 45 and 50) for detecting the game ball at any position of the warp passage 40e is attached, and when the game ball passes through the first proximity switch 72a, the display device 41 displays. The count number of the game ball that has passed through the first proximity switch 72a is displayed, and when the count number exceeds the set count value, it becomes zero and can be counted again, and the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 thereafter. A notice effect having a higher degree of expectation (reliability) than usual may be performed in the hold change notice effect (one or a plurality of them may be applied consecutively) using the hold display generated by winning the prize. Alternatively, when the count number exceeds the set count value, it is expected that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game related to hold (starting memory) will be lengthened, or the special figure fluctuation display game (the fluctuation) currently being executed will be a big hit. A high-degree effect (here, a zone effect) may be made to appear, and the player may be expected to pay attention to the display device 41.

The zone effect is, for example, performed by the entire display device 41, and is an effect of making the background color different from the normal case (for example, blue) (for example, red), and is expected to be a bigger hit than in the normal case. Set it to a high degree. When the number of counts exceeds the set count value, the effect already set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 29, B2006) may be changed to execute the zone effect (between B0014 and B0017 of the main process). Such processing steps may be provided).

The zone effect may be executed as a look-ahead zone effect when the number of counts exceeds the set count value and then a hold with a high expectation of a big hit occurs, instead of the zone effect for the fluctuation described above. The look-ahead zone effect can be set in the look-ahead symbol system command processing (B1214) and the look-ahead variation system command processing (B1216) of FIG. In addition, although a hold with a high degree of expectation has already occurred, it is possible to configure the hold change notice effect (high expectation hold change notice effect) related to the hold, and in this case, the count number is set. If the value is exceeded, the look-ahead zone effect related to the hold may be immediately implemented, and at that time, the hold change notice effect related to the hold may also be implemented (it is not necessary to implement it). The zone effect can be terminated when the hold is exhausted.

The first proximity switch 72a may detect the game ball when the game ball passes through itself, as in the case of the specific area switch 72, and the second proximity switch 72b, the third proximity switch 72c, and the fourth proximity switch 72a, which will be described later, may be used. The same applies to the proximity switch 72d.

The hold change notice effect is executed by the effect control device 300 based on the look-ahead symbol system command process (B1214) and the look-ahead variation system command process (B1216), and the hold display corresponding to the start memory is displayed in a normal color (white). ) To a different color (for example, blue, green, red).

The effect can be controlled by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 (see below). By performing such an effect, both the display device 41 displaying the variable display game and the rotating body unit 800 can be gazed at, and a state in which only the rotating body unit 800 is gazed at can be avoided. A signal such as the first proximity switch 72a may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such an effect without going through the game control device 100.

On the other hand, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is the normal gaming state and the gaming ball is held in all of the cutout portions 812 of the rotating stage 810, the player strikes a stop (a state in which the gaming ball is not fired). It is possible to do it. On the other hand, as described above, all the game balls introduced in the game area 32 do not flow down to the rotating body unit 800, but do not pass through the lower left area of the game area 32, that is, the rotating body unit 800 (some of them). It may jump up from the area and get on the rotating stage 810), and flow down to the area where the starting winning opening 36 can be won.

Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is in the game area 32 at a specific position in the lower left area, the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41 may be used to perform an effect of urging the game ball to continue firing. Suitable.

For example, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (winning area), or the second proximity switch 72b (third detection) arranged at any position on the left side of the game area 32 and lower than the inflow port 40a. When the means, FIGS. 44 and 50) detect the game ball, the upper effect unit 40c displays (lights up) a predetermined count value (initial value) and counts down the count value at predetermined time intervals. When the game ball detects the game ball again in the area during the countdown, the count value returns to the initial value and the countdown is started again to prevent the count value from becoming zero.

On the other hand, when the display device 41 displays a display prompting the launch of the game ball so that the count value does not become zero and succeeds in continuing the mini-game for a predetermined time, the display device 41 has a higher degree of expectation than usual. A high pending change notice effect (or other effect with a high degree of expectation may be used), or an effect that suggests a probability set value is performed.

Here, the "holding change notice effect having a higher expectation than usual" is, for example, an effect in which the expectation suggested by the hold display increases in multiple stages by repeating the success of the above mini-game (for example,). It is possible to perform the hold display color in stages (blue → green → red instead of one stage (blue → red)). As a result, the display device 41 can be focused on and the stoppage can be prevented. At that time, it is possible not to apply the effect to the hold corresponding to the out-of-order, and to increase the contrast between the hold of the out-of-order and the hold of the big hit. As a result, the display device 41 can be focused on, and the effect of preventing stoppage can be enhanced. Of course, if the mini-game fails, or if the execution is stopped in the middle, the expectation level suggested by the hold display will return.

In addition, as "another highly anticipated production", in the special figure variation display game started after the mini game is successfully continued for a predetermined time, for example, a school of characters such as fish and animals moves in one direction. It is possible to execute the group notice effect and the zone effect described above. In addition, when the mini-game is successfully continued for a predetermined time (in the running special figure fluctuation display game), the cut-in notice and the dialogue notice are executed on the display device 41 as "another highly expected effect". You can. In this way, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini-game for a predetermined time even by "another highly expected production".

Further, as the "effect suggesting the probability setting value", for example, by displaying specific identification information in the outlier symbol of the special figure variation display game that is started after the mini game is successfully continued for a predetermined time. It is possible to suggest a probability set value (FIG. 29, B2012). For example, if the probability setting value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), "135" is set as the stop symbol, and if the probability setting value is an even number (2, 4, 6), "246" is set as the stop symbol. Good. In addition, any one of "1", "2", and "3" ("2", "4", "6") of "135" ("246") with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%). Is displayed larger than the other two. Then, it may be suggested with a high probability (for example, 90%) that the numerical value related to the symbol is the probability setting value. Alternatively, as the "effect suggesting the probability setting value", a specific character image appears on the display device 41 and is specified by the color of the character image as an effect independent of the effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed. It may be suggested that the probability setting value of is higher than that of other probability setting values. In this way, since the "effect suggesting the probability setting value" becomes a privilege, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini-game for a predetermined time.

Specifically, the control of the above effect is started, for example, when the game control device 100 does not input a predetermined time detection signal from any switch that detects the game ball such as the gate switch 34a. Alternatively, it is started when the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect the game ball. At this time, the game control device 100 transmits a count value command (initial value) for notifying the count value (initial value) and prompting the continuation of firing to the effect control device 300, and counts down at predetermined time intervals. A count value command for notifying the count value is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 35a or the second proximity switch 72b before the count value becomes zero, the game control device 100 transmits a count value command (initial value) to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 displays the count value on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) by the count value command, and displays (or does not have to be performed) prompting the display device 41 to continue firing the game ball. Then, when the duration of the mini-game exceeds the predetermined time, the game control device 100 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 that has received the predetermined command performs a hold change advance notice effect having a higher expectation (reliability) than usual by using the hold display generated after that, or an effect that suggests a probability set value. I do. By performing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping.

The signals of the first proximity switch 72a and the second proximity switch 72b may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such a mini-game and effect without going through the game control device 100.

When the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect the game ball, some effect image may be displayed on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41, or a sound effect may be output from the speaker 19. You may put it out. As the effect image, in the case of the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device), for example, a mode in which the displayed count value is surrounded by the outer shape of the explosion (speech balloon) for a predetermined time can be applied. Further, in the display device 41, an aspect of displaying a moving image in which transparent (or translucent) bubbles climb from the bottom to the top can be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is also preferable to monitor the state in which the game ball is held by the rotation stage 810 and display it on the display device 41 so that the player can gaze at the display device 41. For example, a fifth proximity switch (not shown, the same as the first proximity switch, etc.) is provided in each notch portion 812, the fifth proximity switch is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is provided. Is input with a command indicating that the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50) has been driven from the game control device 100. Then, the effect control device 300 displays an image imitated by the rotation stage 810 in the screen corner of the display device 41, or in an area different from the variable display area, the hold display area, and the effect display area, and the game in each cutout portion 812. The presence / absence of a ball and the open / closed state of the sluice valve 820 may be displayed.

For example, in the display device 41, a sixth proximity switch (not shown, the same as the first proximity switch, etc.) for detecting a game ball passing through the guide rib 804 is provided, and in the effect control device 300, the sixth proximity switch is used for the game. Every time a ball is detected, a video of the game ball entering the rotation stage 810 from the guide rib 804 is displayed on the screen, and when the fifth proximity switch detects the game ball, the game ball enters the corresponding notch 812 on the screen. The state is displayed so that the state in which the game ball is actually held in the notch 812 can be reflected on the screen. When the ball launcher operates or the player touches the ball launcher (when a touch switch signal is detected), a state in which the game ball enters the rotation stage 810 from the guide rib 804 may be displayed on the screen. .. With these configurations, the player can grasp the situation of the rotary stage 810 on the display device 41 without looking at the rotary stage 810.

Regardless of whether the game ball is actually detected by the 5th proximity switch or the 6th proximity switch, a predetermined timing such as at the start of the left-handed state (or when the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed is displayed). In addition, a state in which the game ball enters the rotation stage 810 may be displayed on the display device 41 as a moving image (may be a still image), and the player may be urged to let the game ball flow down to the rotation stage 810.

Further, the notch portion 812 on the display may be given a role. For example, when a game ball enters the notch 812, the player is given production points, three of the five notches 812 are 1 point, one of the remaining two is 5 points, and the other is 10 points. Is given. This effect point is, for example, a point required to execute the above-mentioned mini-game, and for example, 100 points are consumed for each mini-game. By giving the player the production points for the mini-game in this way, it is possible to give an incentive to let the game balls flow down to the rotating stage 810 one after another. The effect control device 300 can control the above-mentioned point assignment (FIG. 23: B0012) and display the points (FIG. 29: B2002, B2004, B2007). Here, it is preferable that the effect control device 300 displays the current number of points and the number of points consumed in the mini game at a position on the display device 41 that does not overlap with other displays.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls flowing down from the extension portion 806 (guidance groove 807) win the starting winning opening 36, but as described above, they collide with other game balls and win a prize. It may not be. Further, not only the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) but also other game balls may win a prize in the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, a seventh proximity switch (not shown, the same as the first proximity switch, etc.) is also provided in the guide groove 807, the seventh proximity switch is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the start port 1 switch 36a is provided. A command corresponding to the detection is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 compares the number of times the seventh proximity switch detects the game ball with the number of times the start port 1 switch 36a detects the game ball at predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds and 96 seconds described above), and starts the operation. When the mouth 1 switch 36a detects the game ball more frequently, for example, a character such as "Good condition, let's go as it is!" Is displayed on the display device 41 (for example, it is displayed for about 5 seconds). On the contrary, if the number is small, characters such as "Next is okay!" May be displayed (for example, it may or may not be displayed for about 5 seconds). By displaying the encouragement of the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the stop hit.

The fifth proximity switch, the sixth proximity switch, and the seventh proximity switch are electrically connected to the game control device 100, and a command indicating that the fifth proximity switch has been detected by the game control device 100 is issued. It may be sent to the effect control device 300.

[First modification]
FIG. 52A is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800 constituting the first modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the first modification, a component that changes the rolling direction of the game ball is added to the rotating body unit 800. As shown in FIG. 52, one or a plurality of obstacle nails 830 (rolling direction changing members) are planted (arranged) at a position different from the position where the notch 812 of the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810 is arranged. ) Has been done. By planting the obstacle nail 830 in the rotary stage 810, the game ball is temporarily retained in the rotary stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotary stage 810 is irregularly changed. You can improve your interest.

When one obstacle nail 830 is planted, it can be planted at an arbitrary position other than the notch 812 of the rotary stage 810. When a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are planted, it is desirable to plant them so that the distance between the obstacle nails 830 adjacent to each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll toward the center of the rotation stage 810, and the game ball at the center can also roll toward the notch portion 812 or the tray portion 801. The ball can be rolled irregularly.

Further, when a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are planted, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the obstacle nails 830 may be planted so as to have the same central symmetry as the cutout portion 812. In FIG. 52, since the five notches 812 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five-fold symmetry), the obstacle nails 830 are also planted so as to be five-fold symmetric (pentagram shape). Has been done. As a result, the game ball can be directed to any of the notch portions 812 with the same probability. Of course, the arrangement mode of the obstacle nail 830 may be an arrangement mode in which the obstacle nails 830 are planted at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on a circle concentric with the rotation stage 810 (a circle having a radius smaller than the radius of the rotation stage 810).

Further, it is preferable to arrange a bounce member 840 (for example, a slingshot, a flipper) that bounces the flowing game ball toward the rotation stage 810 on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801. The bounce member 840 is a member that mechanically (or electrically) operates when the game ball is received and bounces the game ball toward the upper side of the inclined rolling surface 802 or the rolling surface 811 (direction away from the game area 32). Is.

As a mode of flipping up the game ball, as in the bounce member 840 shown on the left side of FIG. 52, the tray portion 801 receives the game ball that rolls at a substantially right angle toward the game area 32 and directly toward the rotation stage 810. There is a mode of bouncing. Further, like the bounce member 840 shown on the right side of FIG. 52, the game ball that rolls at a shallow angle toward the game area 32 is received and bounces toward the upper side of the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 and then the game. There is an embodiment in which the sphere can be reflected by the wall portions 803A, 803B, 803C and rolled toward the rotating stage 810. In either case, since the game ball rolling on the rotation stage 810 is directed to the rotation stage 810 again, the game ball is temporarily retained in the tray portion 801 or the rotation stage 810, and the notch portion 812 is used for the game. The expectation of holding the ball can be increased.

In the first modification, both the obstacle nail 830 and the bounce member 840 are arranged in the rotating body unit 800, but only one of them may be used.

[Second modification]
FIG. 52B is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800 constituting the second modification of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. In the second modification, instead of the obstacle nail 830 of the first modification, a second rotation stage 890 that rotates coaxially with the rotation stage 810 is provided at the center of the rotation stage 810. The rotary stage 810 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape, and a second rotary stage 890 is arranged in the hollowed out portion. The second rotary stage 890 is arranged so as to be slightly exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Further, in the second rotation stage 890, a plurality of second notch portions 891 (second holding portions) capable of accommodating the game ball are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction (three in FIG. 52B).

The opening in the radial direction of the second notch 891 is opened, and the bottom surface of the second notch 891 forms substantially the same plane as the rolling surface 811 of the rotating stage 810. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the rotation stage 810 easily enters and is held in the second notch portion 891. On the other hand, since the second notch 891 does not have a member for closing the opening in the radial direction, when the opening in the radial direction of the second notch 891 faces the game area 32 side (downward). (When tilted), the game ball held by the second notch 891 can be easily separated from the radial opening of the second notch 891. By applying this second rotation stage 890, it is possible to improve the interest in the rolling direction of the game ball.

The rotation direction of the second rotation stage 890 is preferably the opposite direction (may be the same direction) to the rotation stage 810. The rotation cycle of the second rotation stage 890 may be synchronized with the rotation cycle of the rotation stage 810. Further, the rotation cycle of the second rotation stage 890 may be half the rotation cycle of the rotation stage 810, or may be asynchronous and an arbitrary rotation cycle may be applied.

Further, the second rotary stage 890 can be driven by a motor different from that of the rotary stage 810, or can be driven by the same motor (rotary stage motor 143) as the rotary stage 810. When the second rotary stage 890 is driven by the same motor as the rotary stage 810, the rotary stage 810 and the second rotary stage 890 are mechanically coupled by gears, and the gear ratio is appropriately designed. The rotation ratio between the rotation stage 810 and the second rotation stage 890 can be appropriately designed.

[Third modification example]
FIG. 53 is a perspective view of a third modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a schematic view of a sorting device 850 that constitutes a third modification of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the third modification, the distribution device 850 is arranged at a position in the middle of the warp passage 40e. The sorting device 850 has a first branch flow path 851 that branches at an intermediate position of the warp passage 40e and a flow path of a game ball that is arranged at the branch position of the warp passage 40e and flows down to the warp passage 40e toward the rotation stage 810. A first switching valve 853 (second valve) that can be switched between the first branch flow path 851 and a third switching valve 72c (first detection means,) that detects a game ball in the warp passage 40e. 50 and 54). The discharge port 852 (FIG. 53) of the first branch flow path 851 communicates with the game area 32 (the game area 32 that does not pass through the rotating body unit 800). By applying this sorting device 850, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 54A, the first switching valve 853 has an urging means (spring or the like) so that a portion of the warp passage 40e upstream of the first switching valve 853 communicates with the rotary stage 810 side. ) Is rotating due to the urging force. Then, each time the third proximity switch 72c detects a predetermined number of game balls, the valve solenoid 145 (FIG. 50) is driven to rotate the first switching valve 853 in the opposite direction, and FIG. 54 (b) shows. As shown in the above, a portion of the warp passage 40e upstream of the first switching valve 853 communicates with the first branch flow path 851 (game area 32). Further, when the third proximity switch 72c next detects a game ball flowing down into the warp passage 40e, the drive of the valve solenoid 145 is stopped and the first switching valve 853 is returned to the original position by the urging force of the urging means (not shown). It is designed to rotate. The rotation direction of the first switching valve 853 due to the urging force of the urging means (not shown) and the rotation direction of the first switching valve 853 due to the driving force of the valve solenoid 145 may be opposite to each other.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the third proximity switch 72c, returns to zero each time the count reaches the set count value, becomes a countable state again, and is first switched. A drive signal is transmitted to the valve solenoid 145 (FIG. 50) that drives the valve 853 (second valve), and the drive signal is stopped when the detection signal is then input (FIG. 50). Alternatively, the distribution device 850 may be provided with a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit / stop the drive signal in the same manner as the game control device 100. By changing the set count value, the distribution ratio of the game balls in the distribution device 850 can be arbitrarily changed. In any case, according to the third modification, it is possible to adjust so that the number of game balls flowing down to the rotating stage 810 does not increase too much.

In addition, without providing the third proximity switch 72c (without counting the game ball), the first switching valve 853 is rotated at a predetermined cycle and maintained for a certain period of time to branch the flow path of the game ball to the first branch. It may be switched to the flow path 851. Even in this way, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fourth modification]
FIG. 55 is a front view of a fourth modification of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a schematic view of a first distribution unit 860 (distribution unit) that constitutes a fourth modification of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the fourth modification, the first distribution unit 860 that distributes whether or not to distribute the game ball is arranged in the rotating body unit 800. The first distribution unit 860 is arranged at a position upstream of the inflow port 40a of the game area 32 and upstream of the game ball.

The first distribution unit 860 has a unit main body 861, an introduction port 862 arranged at the upper part of the unit main body 861 for introducing the game ball, and an discharge port arranged at the lower part of the unit main body 861 for discharging the game ball to the game area 32 again. 863 and a second intake flow path 864 extending from the unit main body 861 and communicating with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800) are provided.

Here, an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted at a position above the introduction port 862 of the game area 32, but the game ball flowing down to the left side of the game area 32 has an arbitrary ratio (probability density). Is the maximum ratio, for example 50%), and it is planted so as to flow down to the introduction port 862.

The second intake flow path 864 communicates the introduction port 862 with the inflow port 40a. The second branch flow path 865 branches from a position in the middle of the second intake flow path 864 in the unit main body 861, and the second branch flow path 865 communicates with the discharge port 863. Further, at the branch position of the second intake flow path 864 with the second branch flow path 865, the flow path of the game ball flowing down from the introduction port 862 is introduced to the inflow port 40a (a portion downstream of the branch position of the second intake flow path 864). A second switching valve 866 (third valve) that can be switched between the flow path that flows down toward the second branch flow path 865 and the flow path that flows down toward the second branch flow path 865 is attached. Further, a fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means, FIG. 50) for detecting a game ball flowing down into the second intake flow path 864 is attached to the second intake flow path 864.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the second switching valve 866 is arranged so that a portion of the second intake flow path 864 that is normally upstream of the second switching valve 866 communicates with the second branch flow path 865. Has been done. Then, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven every time it detects a predetermined number of game balls, and as shown in FIG. 56B, a portion upstream of the second switching valve 866 of the second intake flow path 864. Is adapted to communicate with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800).

On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 56B, the portion of the second intake flow path 864 that is normally upstream from the second switching valve 866 is arranged so as to communicate with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800). You may. Then, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven every time a predetermined number of game balls are detected, and as shown in FIG. 56B, a portion upstream of the second switching valve 866 of the second intake flow path 864. May communicate with the second branch flow path 865.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the fourth proximity switch 72d, returns to zero each time the count reaches the set count value, becomes a countable state again, and switches to the second. A drive signal is transmitted to the valve solenoid 146 (FIG. 50) that drives the valve 866 (third valve), and the drive signal is stopped when the detection signal is then input (FIG. 50). Alternatively, the first distribution unit 860 may be provided with a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit / stop the drive signal in the same manner as the game control device 100. By changing the set count value, the distribution ratio of the game balls in the first distribution unit 860 can be arbitrarily changed.

By rotating the first switching valve 853 at a predetermined cycle and maintaining the flow path of the game ball for a certain period of time without providing the fourth proximity switch 72d (without counting the game ball), the flow path of the game ball is seconded. It may be switched to the branch flow path 865. Even in this way, the number of game balls flowing down to the inflow port 40a and thus to the rotary stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fifth variant]
FIG. 57 is a schematic view of a second distribution unit 870 (distribution unit) that constitutes a fifth modification of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a schematic view showing the operation of sorting the game balls by the second sorting unit 870. In the fifth modification, the second distribution unit 870 that distributes whether or not to distribute the game ball to the rotating body unit 800 is arranged at the same position as the first distribution unit 860 in the fourth modification, but the distribution is performed by a machine. Can be done

The second distribution unit 870 of the fifth modification example communicates with the introduction port 872 into which the game ball is introduced, the two discharge ports 873 into which the game ball is discharged, and the introduction port 872, and branches downward from the middle. The Y-shaped flow path 874 (third branch flow path) communicating with the two discharge ports 873 and the Y-shaped flow path 874 are arranged at the branch positions of the Y-shaped flow path 874 and are switched to the two discharge ports 873 each time the game ball is received. It is provided with a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 including a third switching valve 875 that allows the game balls to flow down alternately toward each other.

The distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that the introduction port 872 of the rear-stage distribution mechanism 871 is communicated with one discharge port 873 of the front-stage distribution mechanism 871. Then, at least one of the discharge ports 873 (not communicating with the introduction port 872), which is the terminal end of the plurality of distribution mechanisms 871, communicates with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800). In FIG. 57, the distribution mechanism 871 is connected in four-stage series (distribution mechanisms 871A, 871B, 871C, 871D). The number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 is arbitrary, and is appropriately adjusted according to the ratio of the game balls to be flowed into the inflow port 40a (depending on the design value of the start value S) with respect to the launched game balls. Further, the smaller the number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 (particularly if it is one stage), the more advantageous in terms of cost.

The operation of the distribution mechanism 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The third switching valve 875 (switching valve) constituting the distribution mechanism 871 is composed of a rotating member 876 and a stopper portion 883 that abuts on the rotating member 876 and restricts the rotation of the rotating member 876, and is composed of a Y-shaped flow path 874. It is arranged at the branch position of (FIG. 57).

The rotating member 876 has an inverted T-shape with the T-shape turned upside down, and is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the horizontal bar portion and the longitudinal direction of the vertical bar portion at the joint position between the horizontal bar portion and the vertical bar portion of the inverted T-shape. It has a rotation shaft 880 extending in various directions. The rotating member 876 has an upright portion 877 forming an inverted T-shaped vertical bar portion, a right bottom portion 878 forming a portion on the right side of the rotating shaft 880 of the inverted T-shaped horizontal bar portion, and an inverted T-shape. It is provided with a left bottom portion 879 forming a portion on the left side of the rotation shaft 880 of the horizontal bar portion of the above.

The stopper member 883 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879. That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the rotating member 876 rotates clockwise, the right bottom portion 878 comes into contact with the stopper member 883, and at this time, the standing portion 877 is arranged to be inclined upward to the right from the rotating shaft 880 and left. The bottom portion 879 is arranged so as to be inclined upward on the left side from the rotation shaft 880. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise, the left bottom portion 879 comes into contact with the stopper member 883, and at this time, the standing portion 877 is inclined upward to the left from the rotating shaft 880. The arrangement is such that the right bottom portion 878 is inclined upward to the right from the rotation shaft 880.

Here, in FIG. 58 (a) or FIG. 58 (b), the center of gravity of the standing portion 877 and the center of gravity of the integrated object (bottom portion) including the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 exist on opposite sides of the rotation shaft 880. To do. Therefore, the moment (torque) given to the rotating shaft 880 by the standing portion 877 due to gravity and the moment (torque) given to the rotating shaft 880 by the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 due to gravity are in opposite directions. However, the moment related to the standing portion 877 is designed to be larger than the moment related to the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879. Therefore, the state of FIG. 58 (a) or FIG. 58 (b) is stably maintained as long as the game balls do not come into contact with each other.

Therefore, when the rotating member 876 is freed, the right bottom portion 878 is in contact with the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58 (a), or the left bottom portion 879 is brought into contact with the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). It is in either of the abutting states, and the standing portion 877 hardly stands still in a vertically standing state (a state in which the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 are kept horizontal). Further, even if the standing portion 877 stands still in a vertically standing state, the game ball comes into contact with the rotating member 876 to rotate the rotating member 876 in either direction, so that the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879 Is in contact with the stopper member 883.

The side surface of the standing portion 877 on the right bottom 878 side and the upper surface of the right bottom 878 serve as a right receiving portion 881 for receiving the game ball, and the side surface of the standing portion 877 on the left bottom 879 side and the upper surface of the left bottom 879 hold the game ball. It is a left receiving part 882 to receive. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the introduction port 872 is temporarily held by the right receiving portion 881 or the left receiving portion 882.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the left receiving portion 882 receives the game ball and temporarily holds it, the game ball is arranged at a position biased toward the left bottom portion 879 side of the rotation shaft 880. At this time, the moment given to the rotating shaft 880 by the game ball due to gravity and the moment given to the rotating shaft 880 by the rotating member 876 (the difference between the moment of the standing portion 877 and the moment of the bottom portion including the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879) are Although they are in opposite directions, the moment related to the game ball is larger than the moment related to the rotating member 876. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58B, the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise toward the left bottom portion 879 while holding the game ball, and the left bottom portion 879 comes into contact with the stopper member 883. At this time, since the left bottom portion 879 is arranged so as to be inclined downward to the left from the rotation shaft 880, the game ball rolls on the left bottom portion 879 toward the tip of the left bottom portion 879, is separated from the rotating member 876, and is separated from one discharge port. It flows down toward 873. Further, the standing portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined upward on the left side from the rotation shaft 880. As described above, since the moment given by the standing portion 877 to the rotating shaft 880 is larger than the moment given to the rotating shaft 880 by the bottom portion (right bottom portion 878 and left bottom portion 879), after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876. The left bottom portion 879 is maintained in contact with the stopper member 883, and the right receiving portion 881 can receive the next game ball.

Then, when the next game ball flows down from the introduction port 872, the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball and temporarily holds the game ball, as shown in FIG. 58 (b). At this time, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the arrangement in which the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball, the game ball is arranged at a position biased toward the right bottom portion 878 side of the rotation shaft 880. In this case as well, for the same reason as described above, as shown in FIG. 58A, the rotating member 876 rotates toward the right bottom portion 878 while holding the game ball, and the right bottom portion 878 comes into contact with the stopper member 883. At this time, since the right bottom portion 878 is arranged so as to be inclined downward to the right from the rotation shaft 880, the game ball rolls on the right bottom portion 878 toward the tip of the right bottom portion 878, separates from the rotating member 876, and is separated from the other discharge port. It flows down toward 873. Further, the standing portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined upward to the right side from the rotation shaft 880. For the same reason as described above, even after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876, the right bottom portion 878 remains in contact with the stopper member 883, and the left receiving portion 882 can receive the next game ball. ..

As described above, the third switching valve 875 alternately rotates in the opposite direction each time it receives the game ball, so that the game ball can be alternately distributed toward one discharge port 873 and the other discharge port 873. it can.

As shown in FIG. 57, the distribution when the game balls are introduced from the introduction port 872A of the most upstream one-stage surface distribution mechanism 871A, and the first to 17th game balls are introduced in that order. Think. As shown in FIG. 57, considering that all the third switching valves 875 are tilted to the left in the initial state, the odd-numbered game balls are distributed toward the right discharge port 873 in the first-stage distribution mechanism 871A. , The even-numbered game balls are distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the left side.

In the second-stage distribution mechanism 871, the first, fifth, ninth, thirteenth, and 17th game balls are distributed toward the right discharge port 873, and the third, seventh, eleventh, and fifteenth game balls are distributed. The game ball is distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the left side.

In the third-stage distribution mechanism 871, the first, ninth, and 17th game balls are distributed toward the right outlet 873, and the fifth and thirteenth game balls are distributed toward the left outlet 873. Be done.

In the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871, the first and 17th game balls are distributed toward the right discharge port 873, and the ninth game ball is distributed toward the left discharge port 873. Here, when the 16th game ball is distributed, the 3rd switching valve 875 returns to the initial state, and the 17th game ball is distributed in the same manner as the 1st game ball. Therefore, the second distribution unit 870 repeats the operation of distributing the game balls with 16 pieces as one cycle.

Therefore, in the second distribution unit 870, as shown in (1) to (9) below, by appropriately selecting the discharge port 873 that communicates with the inflow port 40a, the game is played at a ratio of 1/16 to 15/16. The sphere can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800.

(1): When one of the discharge ports 873D (all of which are terminated) of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D is communicated with the inflow port 40a, the ratio is 1 in 16, that is, 1/16. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at the ratio of. The remaining outlets 873A, 873B, 873C, 873D are opened to the game area 32 (the area where the game ball does not flow down to the inflow port 40a) (the same applies hereinafter).

(2): Both discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inflow port 40a, or the open discharge port 873C (terminal) of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C is used as the inflow port. When the game balls are communicated with 40a, the game balls can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 2 out of 16 units, that is, a ratio of 2/16.

(3): When one discharge port 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D and the open discharge port 873C of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the ratio of three to 16 is that is. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 3/16.

(4): The open discharge port 873B (terminal) of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B is communicated with the inflow port 40a, or the open discharge ports 873C and 4 of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C. When both discharge ports 873D of the stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the game balls can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 4 out of 16 units, that is, a ratio of 4/16. it can.

(5): When the open discharge port 873B of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B and one of the discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the ratio of 5 to 16 is that is. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a rate of 5/16.

(6): The discharge port 873B at the end of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B, the open discharge port 873C of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C, or the discharge port 873D of both the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D. When the game balls are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the game balls can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 6 out of 16 units, that is, a ratio of 6/16.

(7): The open discharge port 873B of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B, the open discharge port 873C of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C, and one discharge port 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D. When the game balls are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the game balls can flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 7 out of 16 units, that is, a ratio of 7/16.

(8): The open discharge port 873A (terminal) of the first-stage distribution mechanism 871A is communicated with the inflow port 40a, or the open discharge port 873B of the second-stage distribution mechanism 871B and When both the open discharge ports 873C of the third-stage distribution mechanism 871C and the discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the ratio of eight out of sixteen, that is, 8/16 The game ball can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at the ratio of.

(9): When the open discharge port 873A of the first-stage distribution mechanism 871A is further communicated in the above (1) to (7), the game ball is rotated at a ratio of 9/16 to 15/16, respectively. It can be made to flow down toward 800.

In the fourth modification, the distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in four stages, but only one stage may be used, and a mode in which two stages are connected in series, three stages are connected in series, and five or more stages are connected in series is also applicable. In the distribution unit 860 of the third modification, the distribution mechanism (second switching valve 866) has one stage, but a mode in which a plurality of stages are connected in series as in the fourth modification can also be applied.

[Probability density distribution of start value S]
FIG. 59 is a graph comparing the probability density distribution of the start value S of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment with the probability density distribution of the start value S of the conventional game machine. For example, in a game machine that fires 100 game balls per minute, the start value S can be defined as the number of times the special symbol changes when 100 game balls are fired (the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed), and the start prize is won. It is synonymous with the number of times a game ball wins a prize in the mouth 36. Therefore, for example, when the game ball is continuously fired and the special symbol fluctuates 6.25 times per minute, the start value S becomes 6.25 times / minute.

On the other hand, in the conventional game machine, the game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by an obstacle nail or a windmill planted in the game area 32, and some game balls win a prize in the start winning opening 36. However, the rolling direction of the game ball changes irregularly due to obstacle nails and windmills.

Therefore, in the coordinate system where the horizontal axis is the random variable (start value S) and the vertical axis is the probability density, the start value S has a constant probability density (probability = 1) at the start value S and is a value other than that. It can be defined as a point on the probability density curve where the value is the center of the random variable and the probability density is the peak value, not the point on the delta function where the probability density becomes zero.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, when the set start value (design value) is set to 6.25, the actually observed start value S is centered on 6.25. It will be observed with a probability on the probability density distribution curve (A), which has a very wide distribution and a low peak value. In particular, since the probability density distribution curve (A) has a constant probability density even when the start value S is 0 or 1, this becomes a slump of the start value S (becomes extremely small), and the game ball is started from the winning opening 36. It is difficult to get a stable prize.

Further, in the conventional game machine, even if the set start value is changed, as described above, the position of the horizontal axis of the probability density distribution curve (A) changes, but the peak value remains low, so that the game field ( It is not possible for the hole) side to effectively change the start value S, and it is difficult for the player to experience the change in the start value S.

Further, in the conventional game machine, even if the probability setting value for setting the probability of occurrence of a big hit can be changed, as described above, since the start value S has a slump, the probability setting value changes on the hall side as well. Is difficult to reflect as a change in the probability of occurrence of a jackpot, and it is also difficult for a player to experience a change in the probability setting value as a change in the probability of occurrence of a jackpot.

On the other hand, the third embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of game balls held by the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810) are periodically flowed down toward the start winning opening 36, and the game balls are started winning. It is almost certain that the mouth 36 will win a prize. A number or more of game balls corresponding to the design start value S are supplied from the warp passage 40e to the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810) in one minute.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, for example, when the set start value is set to 6.25, the actually observed start value S has a narrow distribution centered on 6.25 and a peak value. Is a point on the high probability density distribution curve (B). Since the peak value is high in the probability density distribution curve (B), the frequency with which the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 becomes extremely high near the starting value S = 6.25. Further, the probability density when the start value S is 0 or 1 is almost zero, and slump does not substantially occur at the start value S.

Therefore, the starting value S can be set low on the hall side, and even in this case, the slump does not occur and the special symbol fluctuation (variation display game) is almost certainly carried out, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed. it can. In addition, since the degree of reflection in the change in the probability of occurrence of a jackpot due to the change in the probability set value is high, profit adjustment can be easily performed.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the start value S is stable, the rotating body unit 800 holds the game ball before the winning, so that the starting winning is substantially held mechanically. Therefore, the configuration (starting prize memory, starting memory) that electrically holds (memorizes) the starting prize generated when the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 can be omitted, or the maximum degree of holding can be reduced. It is possible.

A case where the set start value = 6.25 is realized in the fourth modification or the fifth modification will be described. 100 game balls are fired left-handed per minute and flow down to the game area 32, and the game balls are distributed with an average probability of 1/2 due to the planted obstacle nails (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit). It is distributed to the unit 870), and it flows down to the rotating body stage at a ratio (probability) of 1 in 8 in the distribution unit, and considering that the flowing game ball almost wins the start winning opening 36, the start value S is ( 100 pieces / minute) x (1/2) x (1/8) = 6.25 pieces / minute. Here, in the fourth modification (first distribution unit 860), the set count value is set to 7 (the count number of the detection signal of the fourth proximity switch 72d is an integer from 0 to 7), and the fifth modification (second modification). In the distribution unit 870), by adopting the configuration of (2) above, the game ball can flow down to the rotation stage 810 at a ratio (probability) of 1 in 8.

Further, in the third embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotation stage 810 is changed, or the drive timing of the sluice valve 820 (valve solenoid 144) is changed (the rotation speed and the drive timing are changed in association with the change of the probability set value). By making it possible to change it), the set start value can be easily changed. At this time, the probability density distribution curve (B) shown in FIG. 59 shifts in the horizontal axis direction while maintaining a high peak value. Therefore, the change in the set start value can be reflected as it is as the change in the start value S.

Therefore, for example, a game machine 10 designed with a low start value S = 5.2 is in a normal gaming state with a game machine designed with a general start value S = 5.8 with the same ball output rate (base). A difference is generated in the payouts, but it is possible to design the player to return the payouts corresponding to the difference as special prize payouts (prize balls by big hits, etc.) (for example, increase the number of big hit rounds). As a result, it is possible to provide a game-oriented game machine that is "sweet" and "attractive" to the player.

The spread of the distribution width of the probability density distribution curve (B) is mainly due to the variation of the flow path of the game ball flowing down from the obstacle nail upstream of the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit 870). It is considered that this is due to the variation in the flow path of the game ball that flows down toward the start winning opening 36 without passing through the notch portion 812. Further, when there is no distribution unit, it is also caused by the variation in the flow path of the game ball flowing down from the obstacle nail arranged in the game area 32 upstream of the inflow port 40a toward the inflow port 40a. By giving a certain degree of distribution width to the probability density distribution curve (B) in this way, it is possible not only to realize a stable start value S, but also to cause an accidental start prize, which makes the game more interesting. Can be improved.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, as a player, a certain number of fluctuations (variation display game) can be surely generated with a fixed investment amount, and the maker side stabilizes the start value S, so that value. Can be set low, and the game hall (hall) side can easily adjust the profit by changing the probability set value.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
According to the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, the game area 32, the winning area (starting winning opening 36, etc.) arranged in the game area 32, and the winning area (starting winning opening 36) are won by the game ball. A winning stabilization means (induction means, rotating body unit 800) for stabilizing is provided. For example, the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) can hold a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and the held game balls are directed toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36, etc.). A guiding means (rotating body unit 800) capable of repeatedly executing the guiding operation is provided. Alternatively, the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) is capable of retaining a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and guides the retained game balls toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36). It is provided with a guiding means (rotating body unit 800, obstacle nail 830, rebound member 840) capable of repeatedly executing the operation. As a result, it is possible to stably enter the game ball into the winning area and enhance the interest of the game. As a result, the start value S can be stabilized at all times. Further, in the conventional game machine, the rolling state of the game ball could not be fully enjoyed, but the rolling of the game ball is performed by the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) of the present embodiment. You can enjoy the situation and improve your interest. In particular, this embodiment targets a game ball before winning, and immediately after starting the game, enjoy the rolling state of the game ball before winning by the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800). This can improve the interest.

In the third embodiment, the winning area is the starting winning opening 36. As a result, the start value S regarding the fluctuation (variation display game) generated by winning the start winning opening 36 can be constantly stabilized.

In the third embodiment, a distribution unit (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit 870) for distributing whether or not to allow the game ball to enter the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is arranged in the game area 32. There is. Thereby, the start value S can be further stabilized.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can guide the game balls held in a predetermined cycle (for example, 8 seconds) one by one toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36). As a result, it is possible to carry out the fluctuation of the symbol (variation display game) at equal intervals in time.

In the third embodiment, the duration (variable time) of the variable display game started by winning the game ball in the winning area (starting winning opening 36, etc.) is substantially the same as the cycle. As a result, both the variable display game and the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be watched, and a state in which only the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is watched can be avoided.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is stopped while waiting for a customer. As a result, it is possible to reduce the power consumption while waiting for customers.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) operates in the first firing mode (left-handed) in which the game ball can flow down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800), and the first firing mode (left-handed). ), The operation is stopped in the second launch mode (right-handed). As a result, the power consumption of the guiding means (rotating stage 810) during the second launch mode (right-handed) is avoided, and the game ball held by the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) when the number of holdings is maximum. Can be prevented from entering the winning area (starting winning opening 36) unnecessarily.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is arranged so as to surround the rotation stage 810 on which the game ball supplied from the game area 32 rolls, and the rotation stage 810, and flows down from the rotation stage 810. A tray portion 801 for allowing the game ball to flow down to the game region 32 is provided, and a plurality of holding portions (notch portions 812) for holding the game ball are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction on the peripheral edge of the rotating stage 810. The rotating stage 810 rotates to sequentially communicate with the holding portion (notch portion 812), and the game ball held by the holding portion (notch portion 812) is placed in the winning region (starting winning opening 36). ), And a first valve (partition valve 820) that repeatedly closes and opens the inlet of the guide groove 807 are arranged. As a result, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (partition valve 820) opens the guide groove 807 when the guide groove 807 faces the holding portion (notch portion 812). As a result, the game ball held by the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be reliably flowed down into the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the holding portion (notch portion 812) has a notch shape opened on the upper surface and the side surface of the rotating stage 810, and has the same plane formed by the upper surface of the rotating stage 810 and the holding portion (notch portion). The distance from the bottom surface of 812) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be configured with a simple configuration, and the game ball held by the holding portion (notch portion 812) is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotation stage 810. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed by contacting the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 811 of the rotation stage 810 with the game ball held by the notch portion 812. Further, since the depth of the notch portion 812 (holding portion) is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held by the notch portion 812 (holding portion) collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being ejected from the notch portion 812 (holding portion).

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801 are inclined downward toward the game area 32. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be reliably flowed down to the game area 32.

In the third embodiment, the tray portion 801 is provided with an extension portion 806 extending from the end portion of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side toward the winning region (starting winning opening 36) in a plan view, and the guide groove 807 is an extending portion. The first valve (partition valve 820) is formed so as to communicate with the tip of the 806, and the distance to the root portion of the extension portion 806 (the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side) is greater than the radius of the game ball. Is arranged so as to be shorter, so as to be higher than the rolling surface 802 of the game ball of the tray portion 801 when closed (so as to intersect the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802), and the guide groove when opened. It is arranged so as to be equal to or lower than the height of the bottom surface of 807. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the game ball rolling in the direction directly toward the guide groove 807 in the tray portion 801 enters the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the distance between the tip of the extending portion 806 and the winning area (starting winning opening 36) in the height direction is longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the tip of the extension portion 806 toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) collides with the game ball flowing down without passing through the extension portion 806, and the winning is hindered. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the game ball that has flowed down without passing through the extension portion 806 will win a prize in the winning area (starting winning opening 36). Therefore, the frequency of winning the game ball in the winning area (starting winning opening 36), that is, the starting value S can be varied to some extent.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (partition valve 820) is arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the upper surface of the rotary stage 810 when closed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the game ball that has rolled from the rotation stage 810 directly into the guide groove 807 without passing through the holding portion (notch portion 812).

In the third embodiment, the rotation stage 810 rotates in the reverse direction at a predetermined timing. As a result, ball biting on the rotary stage 810 can be avoided. In addition, it is possible to suggest a specific gaming state (latent probability change, etc.) by the operation.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 is arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the tray portion 801 and the step between the rotary stage 810 and the same plane is smaller than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball gets over the step and rides on the rotating stage 810, so that the rolling direction when riding on the rotating stage 810 can be changed irregularly. Further, it is possible to delay the timing of the game ball flowing down to the rotation stage 810 by making it easy to collect in front of the rotation stage 810.

In the third embodiment, a rolling direction changing member (obstacle nail 830) capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball is arranged in a region other than the region where the holding portion of the rotating stage 810 is formed. As a result, the game ball can be temporarily retained in the rotation stage 810, and the rotation direction of the game ball in the middle of rolling of the rotation stage 810 can be changed irregularly.

In the third embodiment, a bounce member 840 (slingshot, flipper) that bounces the game ball that rolls the tray portion 801 toward the rotation stage 810 is arranged on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801. As a result, the game ball ejected from the rotation stage 810 can be returned to the rotation stage 810 again, the game ball is temporarily retained on the tray portion 801 or the rotation stage 810, and the game ball is held in the holding portion (notch portion). The degree of expectation held in 812) can be increased.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) has a first intake passage (warp passage 40e) capable of taking in a game ball flowing down the game region 32 and supplying it to the rotation stage 810, and a first intake flow. The first detecting means (third proximity switch 72c) for detecting the game ball flowing down the road (warp passage 40e) and the first taking-in flow path (warp passage 40e) branching from the middle and communicating with the game area 32. A flow path of a game ball arranged at a branch position between the 1-branch flow path 851 and the 1st branch flow path 851 of the 1st intake flow path (warp passage 40e) and flowing down into the 1st intake flow path (warp passage 40e). A second valve (first switching valve 853) that can be switched between a flow path that flows down to the rotary stage 810 and a flow path that flows down to the first branch flow path 851, and a second valve ( The first switching valve 853) operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (third proximity switch 72c). Thereby, it is possible to adjust so that the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 does not increase too much.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) is provided with an introduction port 862 into which the game ball is introduced, and the game ball introduced into the introduction port 862 is directed toward the guiding means (rotating body unit 800). The second intake flow path 864 to be flowed down, the second branch flow path 865 branching from the middle of the second intake flow path 864 and communicating with the game area 32, and the second branch flow path 865 of the second intake flow path 864. The flow path of the game ball, which is arranged at the branch position of the above and flows down to the second intake flow path 864, flows down toward the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) and flows down to the second branch flow path 865. A third valve (second switching valve 866) that can be switched to the road, and a second detecting means (fourth proximity switch 72d) that detects a game ball that has flowed down into the second intake flow path 864 are provided. The third valve (second switching valve 866) operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the second detecting means (fourth proximity switch 72d). Thereby, the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) communicates with the introduction port 872 into which the game ball is introduced, the two discharge ports 873 into which the game ball is discharged, and the introduction port 872, and from the middle. It is arranged at the branch position of the third branch flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874) and the third branch flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874) that branches and communicates with the two discharge ports 873, and is switched each time the game ball is received. It is provided with a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 including a third switching valve 875 that operates to alternately flow the game ball toward the two discharge ports 873. The distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that the introduction port 872 of the rear-stage distribution mechanism 871 is communicated with one discharge port 873 of the front-stage distribution mechanism 871, and a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 (distribution mechanism 871A, distribution mechanism 871B, At least one of the discharge ports 873, which is the end of the distribution mechanism 871C and the distribution mechanism 871D), communicates with the guiding means (rotating body unit 800). As a result, a distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) that mechanically distributes game balls can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the third detection means (second proximity switch 72b) for detecting that the player has passed a specific position different from the winning area in the game area 32 and the third detection means (second proximity switch 72b) are used. It is provided with a lighting display means (upper effect unit 40c, display device 41) that displays lighting based on the detection of a game ball. As a result, even when all the holding portions (notch portions 812) of the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) hold the game ball, it is possible to reduce the stopping hit of the game ball.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device]
FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 60, unlike FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, in the game control device 100 (main board, main board), the output port 134-137 does not exist, the electric circuit is simplified, and the number of wires (number of signals) is increased. ) Is reduced, and a sufficient space (place) for arranging electronic parts and the like can be secured. This is because the communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU111a) and the drivers 138a-138d, 150 and the relay board 70 is performed by serial communication instead of the conventional parallel communication as described below. In the first embodiment, serial communication is performed between the game microcomputer 111 and the effect control device 300, between the game microcomputer 111 and the payout control device 200, and between the game microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500. It doesn't change.

The data from the serial port 173a (first serial port) of the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the driver 138a-138d and the driver 150 by serial communication (serial method) via the serial signal line 174a. The data from the serial port 173b (second serial port) of the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the relay board 70 by serial communication (serial method) via the serial signal line 174b. In FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, data is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 by parallel communication (parallel method). In the present embodiment, the serial communication is a synchronous serial communication, and is performed by, for example, an SPI (serial peripheral interface), but is not limited thereto.

In the present embodiment, the drivers 138c and 138d are each a part of one driver IC chip 156 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). The drivers 138b and 150 are each a part of one driver IC chip 157 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). In addition, each driver may be provided as one IC chip.

The game control device 100 (main board) has a connector portion 160 (CN1) for connecting to a relay board 70 that supplies a test firing test signal to the test firing test device, and the relay board 70 is a game control device 100 (main board). It has a connector portion 162 (CN2) for connecting to the substrate). The connector portion 160 and the connector portion 162 are outlets for electric wires such as cables (or harnesses), and are electrically connected to each other by cables or the like. Similar to the buffer 133, the connector portion 160 (CN1) is also a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store.

[Circuit diagram of game control device]
61A, 61B, and 62 are circuit diagrams illustrating a part of an electric circuit (electronic circuit) provided in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) according to the fourth embodiment. The positions of electronic components (IC chips, etc.), elements, terminals, etc. in the circuit diagram may be irrelevant to the positions where they are actually arranged on the substrate. The terminal may be, for example, a pin. In this embodiment, the substrate means a circuit board such as a printed circuit board.

The serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a terminal A1 for a serial data signal (TXA), a terminal A2 for a serial clock signal (CKA), and a terminal A3 for a chip select signal (SA0) (slave select signal) ( (See FIG. 61). The wiring connected to the terminal A1 is a data line 194 (194a, 194b) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXA), and the wiring connected to the terminal A2 is a clock line for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKA). It becomes 195 (195a, 195b), and the wiring connected to terminals A3 and A4 becomes a chip select line 196 (196a, 196b) for transmitting a chip select signal (SA0, SA1). Since only the serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal A1 is a terminal for serial data output, and the terminal for serial data input from the slave is omitted. .. The chip select signal is a signal for selecting a slave (IC chip) that enables an input operation or an output operation.

The serial signal line 174a (FIG. 60) from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits at least the data line 194 (signal line) for transmitting the serial data signal (TXA) and the serial clock signal (CKA). It is composed of a clock line 195 (signal line) for the purpose.

The serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a terminal B1 for a serial data signal (TXB), a terminal B2 for a serial clock signal (CKB), and a terminal B3 for a chip select signal (SB0) (slave select signal) ( (See FIG. 62). The wiring connected to the terminal B1 becomes the data line 211 for transmitting the serial data signal (TXB), and the wiring connected to the terminal B2 becomes the clock line 212 for transmitting the serial clock signal (CKB), and the terminal B3 The wiring connected to is a chip select line 218 for transmitting the chip select signal (SB0).

Since only the serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal B1 is a terminal for serial data output, and the terminal for serial data input from the slave is omitted. .. Further, when serial communication is performed with only one IC chip (slave) by the serial port 173b, the chip select signal and its chip select line 218 can be omitted.

The serial signal line 174b (FIG. 60) from the serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits at least the data line 211 (signal line) for transmitting the serial data signal (TXB) and the serial clock signal (CKB). It is composed of a clock line 212 (signal line) for the purpose.

[Circuit diagram related to serial communication between the game microcomputer and the driver]
FIG. 61A is a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and each driver in the game control device 100, and is an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around the game microcomputer 111 and each driver IC chip. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates. FIG. 61A shows the transmission status of the external information signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111, the LED drive signal of the batch display device 50, the LED drive signal to the performance display device 152, and the like. The LED drive signal is a signal to the digit line and the segment line of the batch display device 50 or the performance display device 152.

Each of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 is a 16-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit that converts a serial data signal (TXA) from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 into a parallel data signal. The driver IC chips 156 and 157 may be general ones having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The shift register is composed of, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and the bit data of one D-type flip-flop moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop in synchronization with the serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit is composed of, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and latches (holds) and captures (sets) 16-bit data of the shift register at a predetermined latch timing for receiving a latch signal.

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 are cascade-connected (multi-stage connection), and the driver IC chip 156 constitutes the first stage and the driver IC chip 157 constitutes the second stage. The serial data signal (TXA) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 by the data line 194a is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 156, passes through the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, and is transmitted from the output terminal DOUT. It is possible to output. The serial data signal (TXA) output from the output terminal DOUT of the driver IC chip 156 is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 157 and passes through the shift register of the driver IC chip 157.

The same serial clock signal (CKA) from the clock line 195a, the same chip select signal (SA0) from the chip select line 196a, and the same reset signal (RESET) from the reset line 197a are parallel to the driver IC chips 156 and 157. It is input to each input terminal SCK, input terminal / CS, and input terminal / RESET. Note that "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. The shift registers of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 operate synchronously with the same serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 takes in the data of the shift register at the timing (latch timing) when the same chip select signal (SA0) is received as the latch signal. The data taken into the parallel data latch circuit of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 is simultaneously output from the parallel output terminals (PA0-PA7, PB0-PB7) as 16-bit parallel data. Therefore, the two driver IC chips 156 and 157 together form a 32-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit, and convert the serial data signal (TXA) into 32-bit parallel data. Further, the driver IC chips 156 and 157 are simultaneously reset (initialized) by the reset signal from the Schmidt buffer 125, and the internal data is cleared.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 are connected to terminals S17-S7 of the connector portion 181 (CN3), respectively. The terminals S17-S7 of the connector portion 181 (CN3) are connected to the external information terminal 71 by an electric wire such as a cable. Therefore, the signals from the parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 of the driver IC chip 156 are transmitted to the external information terminal 71 as external information AK (external information signal). As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 constitute the driver 138d (FIG. 60). Further, of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, the terminal PB3 supplies a door signal indicating that the glass frame 15 or the like is open.

For example, the external information AK includes a call signal, an out signal, a security signal, a main prize ball signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 1 signal, a start port signal, and a symbol confirmation count signal. It is a door / frame opening signal. The call signal is a signal for calling a staff member of the playground (hall), and the out signal is a signal based on the detection of the out ball detection switch 74. The security signal is a signal transmitted when there is an error or fraud such as magnet fraud or radio wave fraud. The main prize ball signal is a signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the model as jackpot information, and should be turned on at the start of the jackpot and turned off at the end of the jackpot or the end of the time reduction. Signal. The start port signal is a winning signal of the start port based on the detection of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, and the symbol confirmation number signal indicates the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed (the number of symbol confirmations). The door / frame opening signal is a signal indicating that the glass frame 15 and the front frame (game frame) 12 are opened by the glass frame opening detection switch 63 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch). ..

The security signal, the main prize ball signal, the start port signal, the door / frame opening signal, and the symbol confirmation count signal may be set by the external information editing process (A1319) of the timer interrupt process.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, the terminals PB4-PB7 are connected to the terminals L9-L12 of the connector portion 185 (CN4) via the gate driver 183, respectively. The connector portion 185 (CN4) is connected to the batch display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable. The parallel output terminals PB4-PB7 are electrically connected to the digit wire (LED digit 0-3) to which the cathode terminal of the LED lamp (D1-D18) of the batch display device 50 is connected. As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PB4-PB7 constitute the driver 138c (FIG. 60).

Since the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (lamp D1) and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (lamp D1) of the batch display device 50 are 7-segment type (87 segment type when the dot Dp is inserted). , The batch display device 50 can be controlled by regarding it as a 4-digit × 8-segment LED display. In this case, the digit is selected for the digit line (LED digit 0-3).

The gate driver 183 is used for signal amplification and the like, and branches the wiring from the terminals PB4-PB7 in two directions. Further, a pull-up resistor R1 is connected to the wiring from the terminals PB4-PB7. The input terminals I3 and I7 of the gate driver 183 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB4 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminals I2 and I5 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB5 of the driver IC chip 156. I1 and I8 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB6 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminals I4 and I6 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB7 of the driver IC chip 156. The signals of the input terminals I1-I7 are amplified and output from the output terminals O1-O7. The output terminal O5-O7 related to the digit wire is connected to the terminals L9-L12 of the connector portion 185 (CN4), while the output terminal O1-O4 related to the digit wire is a 4-digit 7-segment type (including the dot Dp). It is connected to the digit line (digit 0-3) of the performance display device 152, which is an 8-segment type LED display. The cost can be reduced by sharing the terminals PB4-PB7 between the digit line (digit 0-3) of the performance display device 152 and the digit line (LED digit 0-3) of the batch display device 50.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157, the terminals PA0-PA7 are connected to the terminals L1-L8 of the connector portion 185 (CN4) via the resistor R2, respectively. The connector portion 185 (CN4) is connected to the batch display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable. The parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 are electrically connected to the segment line (LED segment 0-7) to which the anode terminal of the LED lamp of the batch display device 50 is connected. As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 157, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 constitute the driver 138b (FIG. 60).

A current is passed through the segment wire (LED segment 0-7) of the batch display device 50 to the anode terminal of the LED, and the current is drawn from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential via the digit wire (LED digit 0-3). Then, a current flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method) to light the LEDs.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157, terminals PB0-PB7 are segment lines of the performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) LED display. Electrically connect to (ag, Dp). As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 157, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PB0-PB7 constitute the driver 150 (FIG. 60).

By passing a current through the segment wire (ag, Dp) of the performance display device 152 to the anode terminal of the LED and drawing the current from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential via the digit wire (digit 0-3). , A current flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method and the LEDs are turned on. In this way, the performance display device 152 can display the probability set value, the accessory ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls as the performance display.

As described above, the external information signal, the LED drive signal of the batch display device 50 (signal to the digit line and the segment line), and the LED drive signal of the performance display device 152 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line) are for gaming. It is included in the serial data signal (TXA) synthesized by the output process (A1306) and transmitted by the microcomputer 111, and is output as a parallel data signal by the driver IC chips 156 and 157.

FIG. 61B is a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the solenoid driver 138a in the game control device 100, and is an electric circuit (electronic) around the game microcomputer 111 and the IC chip for the solenoid driver. It is a circuit diagram exemplifying the circuit). The status of transmission of the solenoid drive signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 is shown.

The IC chips 138a-1 and 138a-2 for the solenoid driver constitute a driver (drive circuit) 138a (FIG. 60) that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal as a parallel data signal. The IC chip 138a-1 is a general 8-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The IC chip 138a-2 is a Darlington current amplifier that amplifies a current signal from the IC chip 138a-1 by a Darlington connection in which a plurality of transistors are directly connected.

The serial data signal (TXA) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 by the data line 194b is input to the input terminal SI of the IC chip 138a-1 and passes through the shift register of the IC chip 138a-1. The input terminal SCK, input terminal / G, and input terminal / SCLR of the IC chip 138a-1 have a serial clock signal (CKA), a gate signal (GATE) as an enable signal, and a reset signal from the Schmidt buffer 125, respectively. It is input by the clock line 195b, the enable signal line 198b (198), and the reset line 197b. The data line 194b may be branched from the data line 194a (FIG. 61A), and the clock line 195b may be branched from the clock line 195a (FIG. 61A).

The shift register of the IC chip 138a-1 is operated by a serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit of the IC chip 138a-1 takes in the data of the shift register by the chip select signal (SA1) input to the input terminal RCK. The chip select signal (SA1) here functions as a latch signal. The data taken into the parallel data latch circuit of the IC chip 138a-1 is output from the parallel output terminal (QA-QH) as an 8-bit parallel data signal when the gate signal (GATE) is input. The gate signal (GATE) functions as an enable signal that enables the output of the IC chip 138a-1. When the gate signal (GATE) is input to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer, a parallel data signal is output from the parallel output terminal (QA-QH) via an output circuit that enables output operation. Further, the IC chip 138a-1 is reset by the reset signal, and the internal data is cleared.

Of the parallel data signals generated from the serial data signal (TXA) by the IC chip 138a-1, the signal from the parallel output terminal QE is payout control as a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball by the ball launcher. It is output toward the device 200. The signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC are output as a large winning opening solenoid drive signal, a lever solenoid drive signal, and a general electric solenoid drive signal, respectively. In other words, the big prize opening solenoid drive signal, lever solenoid drive signal, and general electric solenoid drive signal are transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 by being included in the serial data signal (TXA), and are transmitted by the IC chip 138a-1 as a parallel data signal. Is output as. Even if the number of solenoids differs depending on the model of the game machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is output from the game microcomputer 111 (CPU111a) by serial communication, so that the wiring required for parallel communication is required. The number of games can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) can be easily shared between different models.

Here, the large winning opening solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the large winning opening solenoid 39b that opens the special variable winning device 39, and the lever solenoid drive signal drives the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86. The normal electric solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

The IC chip 138a-2 amplifies the large winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the general electric solenoid drive signal from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1. The drive signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1 are input to the input terminals J1-J3 of the IC chip 138a-2 via the resistor R4, and are output from the output terminals K1-K3 after amplification. To do. The large winning opening solenoid drive signal, lever solenoid drive signal, and general electric solenoid drive signal from the output terminals K1-K3 are not only transmitted to the large winning opening solenoid 39b, lever solenoid 86b, and general electric solenoid 37c, respectively, as well. It is also transmitted to the relay board 70 (FIG. 60).

[Circuit diagram related to serial communication between the game microcomputer and the relay board]
FIG. 62 illustrates a circuit diagram related to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the relay board 70 in the game control device 100 (main board), and also shows the game microcomputer 111 and the connector unit 160 (CN1). It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the peripheral electric circuit (electronic circuit).

As serial signals output from terminals B1-B3 of the serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111, the serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), and the chip select signal (SB0) are each connected to the connector portion 160 (CN1). ) Serial data signal (TXB) terminal D7 (signal terminal), serial clock signal (CKB) terminal D6 (signal terminal), chip select signal (SB0) terminal D3 (chip select terminal) and buffer 133 Is transmitted via. When serial communication is performed with only one IC chip (slave) by the serial port 173b, the chip select signal and the chip select line 218 to which the chip select signal is transmitted may be omitted in some cases.

The serial data signal (TXB) includes a test firing test signal transmitted to the relay board 70 that is electrically connected to the connector unit 160 (CN1). The test firing test signal related to the game machine 10 is transmitted as a serial data signal (TXB) from the game microcomputer 111 to the relay board 70, unlike the conventional parallel data signal. The test firing test signal is a signal in which information necessary for the test firing test, such as on / off information of the various switches shown in FIG. 60, is taken in by the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU111a) and collectively transmitted as serial data. Therefore, even if the number of switches differs for each model of the game machine 10, the wiring for each switch required for parallel communication can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) is shared between different models. It becomes easy to become.

The serial data signal (TXB) is converted into a parallel data signal on the relay board 70, and then output to a test firing test apparatus for performing a test firing test. Therefore, it becomes easy to standardize the relay board 70 between different models only by preparing the wiring necessary for serial communication in advance on the relay board 70 (relay means).

Examples of the above-mentioned various switches include a gate switch 34a, a start port 1 switch 36a, a start port 2 switch 37a, a winning port switch 35a, a large winning port switch 39a, a specific area switch 72, and a remaining ball discharge port switch 73. The solenoid drive signal as the test firing test signal is transmitted from the driver 138a to the relay board 70 by another route as described above.

In the timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program, part of the game control program) of FIG. 6A, on / off information (on / off signals) of various switches is input to and captured by the game microcomputer 111 (CPU111a) (input processing (A1303)). , Winning port switch / status monitoring process (A1310)), and then transmission processing as a test firing test signal of serial data (output processing (A1306)).

Further, as the test firing test signal to be transmitted in the output processing (A1306) of the timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program), the symbol data (set by A3403 and A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol number, and the special figures 1 and 2 Signals related to the start of fluctuations (set in A3205 and A3210), signals related to the end of fluctuations in Special Figures 1 and 2 (set in A2609), signals related to the start of jackpots in Special Figures 1 and 2 (set in A2610), right Signals related to hitting instructions or left-handing instructions (on / off of launch position designation signal 1) (set by A2610, A2614, etc.), signals related to opening start and end of opening of the grand prize opening (on / off of special electric accessory 1 operating signal) ( (Set by A2611 and A2613).

Further, as the test firing test signal transmitted and processed in the output processing (A1306), a signal regarding the start and end of the normal-figure variation display game and a signal regarding the start and end of the normal electric operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal). On / off), signal related to start / end of high probability state (special symbol 1 high probability state signal on / off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on / off), signal related to start and end of time reduction (special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal) On / off, special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal on / off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal on / off, normal symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal on / off, etc.), game machine error status signal, etc.

The test firing test signal for the game machine 10 is transmitted to the relay board 70 as a serial data signal (TXB) via the connector unit 160 (CN1).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a terminal OE to which an enable line 214 (enabled wiring) that enables the operation of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 (predetermined circuit) provided on the relay board 70 is connected. The enable signal (OE) output from the terminal OE of the game microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the enable signal terminal D2 (enabled terminal) of the connector unit 160 (CN1) via the buffer 133. The wiring to which the enable signal is transmitted is referred to as the enable line 214. A pull-up resistor R is connected to the enable line 214 before connecting to the buffer 133.

Further, the reset signal (Reset) from the Schmidt buffer 125 is transmitted to the terminal D10 (reset terminal) for the reset signal of the connector unit 160 (CN1) via the buffer 133. The wiring to which the reset signal is transmitted is referred to as the reset line 216 (reset wiring).

In addition, the connector portion 160 (CN1) has grounded grounding terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, D9 and power supply terminals D11, D12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

The buffer 133 is a three-state buffer, and when the input to the / 1G terminal is L level (GND), the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminal 1A1-1A4 is used as it is as the output terminal 1Y1-1Y4. When the input to the / 1G terminal is H level, the input terminal 1A1-1A4 and the output terminal 1Y1-1Y4 are in a high impedance state and are electrically disconnected. When the input to the / 2G terminal is L level (GND), the buffer 133 outputs the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminal 2A1-2A4 as it is from the output terminal 2Y1-2Y4, and outputs / 2G. When the input to the terminal is H level, the input terminal 2A1-2A4 and the output terminal 2Y1-2Y4 are in a high impedance state and are electrically disconnected. Note that "/" indicates a negative logic terminal.

The buffer 133 is provided as an option to correct the voltage (L level or H level) of the logical value and is provided. When the wiring between the game microcomputer 111 and the connector portion 160 (CN1) is short, the buffer 133 is provided. 133 is no longer needed.

In FIG. 62, since the inputs to the / 1G terminal and the / 2G terminal are L level (GND), the signals input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4 and 2A1-2A4 are the output terminals 1Y1-1Y4 and 2Y1-2Y4, respectively. Output from. Therefore, the reset signal (RESET), serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB), chip select signal (SB0), and enable signal (OE) are input terminals 1A1, 1A3, 1A2, 1A4 of the buffer 133, respectively. , 2A1 and output from the output terminals 1Y1, 1Y3, 1Y2, 1Y4, 2Y1 toward the connector unit 160 (CN1). Output terminal 1Y1 for reset signal (RESET), output terminal 1Y3 for serial data signal (TXB), output terminal 1Y2 for serial clock signal (CKB), output terminal 1Y4 for chip select signal (SB0), enable signal ( The output terminal 2Y1 for OE) is connected to the terminal D10, the terminal D7, the terminal D6, the terminal D3, and the terminal D2 of the connector portion 160 (CN1) by wiring, respectively.

[Wiring example 1]
FIG. 63 shows a wiring example (wiring example 1) between the connector portion 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 on the board of the game control device 100 (that is, the main board and the main board). It is a figure explaining based on the position (physical arrangement) where a wiring is actually arranged.

In the present embodiment, the substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100 is a general double-sided printed circuit board (double-sided substrate). In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate. The circuit components may be arranged on both sides or the lower surface of the substrate. In the printed circuit board (double-sided board) as the main board, the wiring of the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, etc. and the terminals to which they are connected are on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). It is arranged on the upper surface of the lower surface (back side, lower layer) (the lower surface may be used). The substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100 may be a general multilayer printed circuit board (multilayer substrate). In this case, in the printed circuit board as the main board, the wiring of the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which they are connected are outer layers (top layer, surface layer). ), And the inner two layers (inner layer) are the power supply layer and the ground layer (ground layer, GND layer).

The terminal to which the terminal of the connector portion 160 (CN1) is connected by wiring is the terminal of the buffer 133 when the buffer 133 is provided, but is the terminal of the game microcomputer 111 when the buffer 133 is not provided. is there.

When the buffer 133 is provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, the reset line 216 from the terminal D10, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 , Output terminal 1Y3 for serial data signal (TXB) of buffer 133, output terminal 1Y2 for serial clock signal (CKB), output terminal 2Y1 for enable signal (OE), output terminal for reset signal (SET), respectively. 1Y1 is connected to the output terminal 1Y4 for the chip select signal (SB0).

When the buffer 133 is not provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are the gaming microcomputer 111, respectively. It is connected to the terminal B1 for the serial data signal (TXB), the terminal B2 for the serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal OE for the enable signal (OE), and the terminal B3 for the chip select signal (SB0). The reset line 216 from the terminal D10 is connected to the terminal RESET for the reset signal (RESET) at a place other than the gaming microcomputer 111, but the position of the terminal RESET may be different from that in FIG. 63.

As described above, the connector unit 160 (CN1) has a plurality of signal terminals D6 and D7 to which the clock line 212 (signal line) and the data line 211 (signal line) are connected, and an enable line 214 to which the enable line 214 is connected. A terminal D2 and a reset terminal D10 to which the reset line 216 is connected are provided.

Further, the connector portion 160 (CN1) includes ground terminals D4 and D5 arranged at positions closer to the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the enable terminal D2. Since the distance between the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be widened by the ground terminals D4 and D5, and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5, the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded. Interference (cross talk, mixed lines) with and can be prevented or suppressed.

Further, the ground terminal D4 is closer to the signal terminal D6 (clock terminal) than the chip select terminal D3. The ground terminal D5 is closer to both the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the chip select terminal D3. Since the distance between the chip select terminal D3 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be widened by the ground terminals D4 and D5 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5, the chip select terminal D3 and the signal terminal D6 can be shielded. , Interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) with D7 can be prevented or suppressed.

Further, the connector portion 160 (CN1) includes a ground terminal D8 arranged at a position closer to the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the reset terminal D10. The connector unit 160 (CN1) includes a ground terminal D9 arranged at a position closer to the signal terminal D7 (data terminal) than the reset terminal D10. The ground terminals D8 and D9 can widen the distance between the reset terminals D10 and the signal terminals D6 and D7, and the ground terminals D8 and D9 can shield the signal terminals D6 and D7. Therefore, the reset terminals D10 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded. Interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) with and can be prevented or suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the printed circuit board (double-sided board), the ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, and D9 of the connector portion 160 (CN1) on the upper surface are ground wires existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) (FIG. It is connected to the ground by a through hole or a through via (not shown). The power supply terminals D11 and D12 on the upper surface are connected to the power supply lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes, through vias, or the like. The grounding wire (not shown) to which these grounding terminals are connected and the power supply line (not shown) to which the power supply terminal is connected may exist on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). When the main board is a multilayer board, the ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, and D9 of the connector portion 160 (CN1) are ground layers (ground layer, GND layer) inside the main board (printed circuit board). ) Is connected by a through hole or a through via. Further, the power supply terminals D11 and D12 are connected to the power supply layer inside the main board (printed circuit board) by through holes, through vias, or the like.

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce interference (crosstalk, crosstalk, influence) with other wiring on the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the communication frequency is high and the pulse signal (high-speed serial signal) is frequently used. The data line 211 and the clock line 212 to which the signal is transmitted are arranged together, and there is no other wiring between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines). Other wiring here is an enable line 214, a reset line 216, a chip select line 218, and the like, for which a pulse signal is not frequently transmitted. The minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, that is, the minimum distance between the plurality of signal lines can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. The interval (the minimum interval that can prevent interference in order to make the wiring dense) is set.

In the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the distance W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (here, the clock line 212) on the side close to the enable line 214 is the minimum between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. Wider than the interval W1 (MIN). Further, the distance W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) on the side closer to the reset line 216 is wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN). Further, the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) on the side closer to the chip select line 218 is wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN).

Since the interval W2 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) that can prevent interference (W2> W1 (MIN)), interference between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) can be prevented. Since the interval W3 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) that can prevent interference (W3> W1 (MIN)), interference between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. Since the interval W4 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) that can prevent interference (W4> W1 (MIN)), interference between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. In particular, since the test firing test signal is transmitted from the connector portion 160 (CN1) to the relay board 70 via an electric wire such as a cable, the test firing test may be adversely affected unless interference is prevented.

The data line 211 (signal line) and the clock line 212 (signal line) pass between the opposite terminals of the connector portion 160 (CN1), but the terminal portion 160 (CN1) passes nearby. If the interval between the signal line and the signal line is also larger than the interval W1 (MIN), interference (crosstalk) between the terminal and the signal line can be prevented or reduced.

Further, in the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the data line 211, the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines), the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 are located in the predetermined area 201. They are arranged in parallel in one direction (horizontal direction). The predetermined area 201 is bent from a state in which the wirings (data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214, reset line 216, chip select line 218) are arranged in one direction (horizontal direction) toward the terminal. The area between the point and the terminal is not included. In the predetermined area 201, the distance W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) is wider than the distance W1 between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (W2> W1). Further, the interval W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the interval W1 (W3> W1). Further, the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the distance W1 (W4> W1). By adjusting the wiring intervals in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for interference (crosstalk) to occur in the predetermined region 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel and interference (crosstalk) is inherently likely to occur. In the present embodiment, the interval W1 between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 in the predetermined area 201 matches the minimum interval W1 (MIN).

[Wiring example 2]
In FIG. 64, the wiring actually arranges the wiring example (wiring example 2) between the connector portion 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. It is a figure explaining based on the position (physical arrangement) to be done. In the wiring example 2, the signal passing through each terminal is changed from the wiring example 1 in FIG. 63, and the pattern of the connector wiring to the connector portion 160 (CN1) is also changed.

In FIG. 64, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. Therefore, the relationships of W2> W1 (MIN), W3> W1 (MIN), and W4> W1 (MIN) are established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 in which the wirings are arranged in parallel, the relationship of W2> W1, W3> W1, and W4> W1 is established.

Specifically, in FIG. 64, the terminal for the serial data signal (TXB), the terminal for the serial clock signal (CKB), and the terminal for the enable signal (OE) are interchanged with each other from the wiring example 1 of FIG. There is. In the connector unit 160 (CN1), the terminal D2 is a clock terminal for a serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal D6 is a data terminal for a serial data signal (TXB), and the terminal D7 is an enable terminal for an enable signal. The arrangement of the terminals of the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 is also interchanged from the wiring example 1 of FIG.

By such replacement of terminals, in the wiring example 2 of FIG. 64, in the connector wiring to the connector portion 160 (CN1), the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (plurality of signal lines) are collectively arranged on the outside (right side). The enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 are also arranged together on the outside (left side) of the other. Therefore, in the wiring example 2 of FIG. 64, even if the maximum widths of the left and right sides of the connector wiring are the same as those of the wiring example 1 of FIG. The distance W3 between the 216 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) and the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) can be widened as compared with the wiring example 2 of FIG. 63, and frequently. Has an enhanced effect of preventing interference by signal lines (data line 211 or clock line 212) with other wiring such as enable line 214, reset line 216, and chip select line 218 to which a pulse signal is not transmitted.

[Wiring example 3]
In FIG. 65, the wiring actually arranges the wiring example (wiring example 3) between the connector portion 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. It is a figure explaining based on the position (physical arrangement) to be done.

In this modification of FIG. 65, in the connector portion 160 (CN1), the reset terminal and the chip select terminal are exchanged from the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the terminal D3 becomes the reset terminal, and the terminal D10 becomes the chip select terminal. It has become.

In the wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, unlike the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b are sandwiched from both sides of the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines) arranged together. Have been placed. By electrically shielding a plurality of signal lines from both sides with a ground wire 222a and a ground wire 222b, to other wiring (enable wire 214, reset wire 216, chip select wire 218, etc.) by the plurality of signal wires. Interference (crosstalk) can be reduced. In addition, in order to reduce (prevent) interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, a ground line connected to the ground terminal D9 may be arranged between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 as well. ..

Further, in the wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, the ground line 222c is arranged outside the enable line 214 (opposite to the clock line 212), and the ground line 222d is arranged outside the reset line 216 (opposite to the data line 211). Is placed. By sandwiching the enable wire 214 between the ground wire 222a and the ground wire 222c from both sides and electrically shielding it, other wiring to the enable wire 214 (clock wire 212, data wire 211, and wiring not connected to the connector portion 160). Interference from) can be reduced. Further, by sandwiching the reset wire 216 between the ground wire 222b and the ground wire 222d from both sides and electrically shielding the reset wire 216, other wiring to the reset wire 216 (clock line 212, data line 211, and connection to the connector portion 160 is connected. Interference from (including wiring that does not) can be reduced.

The grounding wires 222a-222d may be collectively referred to as grounding wiring. The data line 211, the clock line 212, and the enable line 214 are wirings used for outputting a test firing test signal relating to the game machine, but may be collectively referred to as signal wirings. In the main board, each signal wiring (data line 211, clock line 212, and enable line 214) is sandwiched between a plurality of ground wires, arranged between them, and shielded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) occurs between the signal wiring for outputting the test signal and other wiring, which adversely affects the test of the gaming machine.

Specifically, a ground line 222a is arranged between one signal line (clock line 212) and the enable line 214, and the other signal line (data line 211) and the reset line 216 (and thus the chip select line 218). A ground wire 222b is arranged between them. A ground wire 222c is arranged outside the enable wire 214, and a ground wire 222d is arranged between the reset wire 216 and the chip select wire 218. The ground wire 222a is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D4. The ground wire 222b is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D1. The ground wire 222c is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D8. The ground wire 222d is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D5. The ground wire 222a, the ground wire 222b, the ground wire 222c, and the ground wire 222d are connected to the grounded terminal (2A2, 2A3, etc.) of the buffer 133 or the grounded terminal (not shown) of the gaming microcomputer 111. By doing so, the effect of the shield is further strengthened.

In FIG. 65, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. Therefore, the relationships of W2> W1 (MIN), W3> W1 (MIN), and W4> W1 (MIN) are established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 in which the wirings are arranged in parallel, the relationship of W2> W1, W3> W1, and W4> W1 is established.

[Modification example of wiring]
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a wiring example (modification example) in the case where the chip select line 218 is omitted, based on a position (physical arrangement) in which the wiring is actually arranged.

In this modification, the connector portion 160 (CN1) does not have a chip select terminal, the terminal D3 becomes an enable terminal, and the terminal D2 becomes a ground terminal (FIG. 66 (b)). Further, the positions of the terminals of the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 are also changed from FIG. 63 (FIG. 66 (a)).

Also in this modification, the relationship of W2> W1 (MIN) and W3> W1 (MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, the relationship of W2> W1 and W3> W1 is established. Therefore, also in this modification, it is possible to reduce the interference (crosstalk) of the data line 211 and the clock line 212 with other wirings (enable line 214 and reset line 216).

〔Relay board〕
FIG. 67 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit diagram relating to the relay board 70, and also exemplifying an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around the connector portion 162 (CN2) and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

In the present embodiment, the relay board 70 is also a double-sided printed circuit board (double-sided board) like the board (main board) of the game control device 100. In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the relay board 70. The circuit components may be arranged on both sides or the lower surface of the relay board 70. In the relay board 70, the wiring of the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which they are connected are on the upper surface (front side, upper layer) and the lower surface (back side, lower layer). Of these, it is placed on the upper surface (or the lower surface). The relay board 70 may be a general multi-layer printed circuit board (multi-layer board). In this case, in the relay board 70, the wiring of the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which they are connected are arranged in the outer layer (top layer, surface layer). The inner two layers (inner layers) become the power supply layer and the ground layer (ground layer, GND layer).

The connector portion 162 (CN2) of the relay board 70 is connected to the connector portion 160 (CN1) of the game control device 100 (main board) by an electric wire such as a cable. The terminals F1-F12 of the connector portion 162 (CN2) correspond to the terminals D1-D12 of the connector portion 160 (CN1) and are electrically connected to each other. The connector portion 162 (CN2) has grounded ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, F9 and power supply terminals F11, F12 to which a voltage of 5 V is supplied.

In the present embodiment, in the relay board 70 (double-sided board), the ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, and F9 on the upper surface are through holes or penetrate through the ground wires (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer). It is connected by vias and is grounded. The power supply terminals F11 and F12 on the upper surface are connected to the power supply lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes, through vias, or the like. The grounding wire (not shown) to which these grounding terminals are connected and the power supply line (not shown) to which the power supply terminal is connected may exist on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). When the relay board 70 is a multilayer board, the ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, and F9 are connected to the internal ground layer (ground layer, GND layer) by through holes, through vias, or the like. Further, the power supply terminals F11 and F12 are connected to the internal power supply layer by through holes, through vias, or the like.

The serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB), chip select signal (SB0), enable signal (OE), and reset signal (RESET) from the connector unit 160 (CN1) are each connected to the connector unit 162 (CN2). The terminals F7, F6, F3, F2, F10 of the above are transmitted to the data line 211, the clock line 212, the chip select line 218, the enable line 214, and the reset line 216.

The serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB), chip select signal (SB0), enable signal (OE), and reset signal (RESET) are input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 via the buffer 191. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 converts the test-fire test signal (serial data) included in the serial data signal (TXB) into a parallel data signal and outputs the test-fire test signal as parallel data.

The buffer 191 is a three-state buffer like the buffer 133, and corrects and outputs a logical value voltage (L level or H level). The buffer 191 uses the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals NA1-NA8 as it is from the output terminal NY1-NY8 when the inputs to the / 1G terminal and the / 2G terminal are both L level (GND). When the output is made and either the input to the / 1G terminal or the input to the / 2G terminal is H level, the input terminal NA1-NA8 and the output terminal NY1-NY8 are in a high impedance state and are electrically disconnected. Note that "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. In FIG. 67, the inputs to the / 1G terminal and the / 2G terminal are both L level (GND), and the signals of the input terminals NA1-NA8 are output from the output terminals NY1-NY8, respectively.

The reset line 216 and the data line 211 from the connector unit 162 (CN2) are connected to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of the buffer 191. The reset signal (RESET) of the reset line 216 and the serial data signal (TXB) of the data line 211 are input to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of the buffer 191, respectively, and directed from the output terminals NY1 and NY2 to the serial parallel conversion circuit 192. And output.

On the other hand, the clock line 212 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191. The serial clock signal (CKB) of the clock line 212 is input to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191 and output from the output terminals NY3 and NY4 as serial clock signals CKB1 and CKB2 toward the serial parallel conversion circuit 192.

The chip select line 218 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA5 and NA6 of the buffer 191. The chip select signal (SB0) of the chip select line 218 is input to the input terminals NA5 and NA6 of the buffer 191 and output from the output terminals NY5 and NY6 as chip select signals SB01 and SB02 toward the serial parallel conversion circuit 192. ..

The enable line 214 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA7 and NA8 of the buffer 191. The enable signal (OE) of the enable line 214 is input to the input terminals NA7 and NA8 of the buffer 191 and output from the output terminals NY7 and NY8 as enable signals OE1 and OE2 toward the serial parallel conversion circuit 192.

Before connecting to the buffer 191, a pull-up resistor R is connected to the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218.

Regarding the relationship of the intervals between the wirings of FIGS. 63 to 66, the interval W1 or the minimum interval W1 (MIN) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 on the relay board 70, the enable line 214 and the enable line 214. Distance W2 between the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) on the side closer to the reset line 216, distance W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) on the side closer to the reset line 216, chip select It is also applicable to the distance W4 between the line 218 and the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) on the side close to the chip select line 218. For example, the relationship of W2> W1 (MIN), W3> W1 (MIN), W4> W1 (MIN) is established between the connector portion 162 (CN2) and the buffer 191 and each wiring is arranged in parallel. In the predetermined area 201, the relationship of W2> W1, W3> W1, and W4> W1 is established. Therefore, even on the relay board 70, the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) interferes with other wiring such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 in which the pulse signal is not frequently transmitted. The effect of prevention is strengthened.

The serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 is composed of 10 cascade-connected 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j, and converts a maximum 8 × 10-bit serial data signal (TXB) into a parallel data signal for a test firing test signal. Can be output as. The serial data signal (TXB) sequentially passes through the serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j.

The five 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e (first group) and the five 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j (second group) have branched serial clock signals CKB1 and CKB2, respectively. , Chip select signals SB01 and SB02, and enable signals OE1 and OE2 are simultaneously input in parallel. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192e of the first group and the serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192f-192j of the second group operate in synchronization, and at the same time, the parallel data signals (test firing test) are simultaneously performed by the enable signals OE1 and OE2. Signal) is output. Further, a reset signal (RESET) can be simultaneously input to each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j in parallel. That is, each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is reset (initialized) at the same time by the reset signal for the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192, and the internal data is cleared.

Each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is a general 8-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0) function as latch signals. The parallel data latch circuit takes in the shift register data by the chip select signals SB01 and SB02. The data taken into the parallel data latch circuit of each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is output as an 8-bit parallel data signal when the enable signal OE (OE1 or OE2) is input. When the enable signal OE is input to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer, a parallel data signal is output via an output circuit that enables output operation.

When there is no chip select line 218 as shown in FIG. 66, the output circuit may be eliminated and the enable signal OE (OE1 or OE2) may be used as the latch signal. The parallel data latch circuit of each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j takes in the data of the shift register at the timing when the enable signal OE is input as the latch signal, and outputs it as it is as an 8-bit parallel data signal.

Further, when the latch clock is used as the latch signal of the chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0), the pulse signal is frequently transmitted to the chip select line 218 as well as the data line 211 and the clock line 212. It is not necessary to include the chip select line 218 in the plurality of signal lines and arrange the data line 211, the clock line 212, and the chip select line 218 together so that the relationship of W4> W1 (MIN) is not established.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined circuit in which the enable line 214 can operate is the serial parallel conversion circuit 192 provided on the relay board 70, and the operation of the predetermined circuit is an output operation, but the operation is limited to this. is not it. For example, the enable line 214 or a separately provided enable line can be connected to the / 1G terminal and the / 2G terminal of the buffer 191 to control the output operation or the input operation of the buffer 191.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game (variable display game) is a special result. The game machine 10 has a plurality of signal lines (for example, data lines 211 and clock lines 212) for communicating with a predetermined circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion circuit 192), and an enable line 214 (or enable line 214) that enables the operation of the predetermined circuit. A board (for example, a main board 100 and a relay board 70) to which a reset line 216) for resetting a predetermined circuit is wired is provided. On the board, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line on the side closer to the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) is the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines. ) Wider.

Since the minimum interval W1 (MIN) between a plurality of signal lines is usually an interval that can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the plurality of signal lines, in the fourth embodiment, the enable line 214 ( Alternatively, by making the distance W2 (or W3) between the reset line 216) and the signal line closer to the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines. Interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line can be prevented or suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the plurality of signal lines include a clock line 212 and a data line 211 for performing serial communication. The data line 211 transmits a test signal (for example, a test firing test signal) relating to the game machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or suppress interference from the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) with the test signal, which is an important signal, and prevent an adverse effect on the test of the game machine 10.

In the fourth embodiment, on the board (for example, main board 100, relay board 70), a plurality of signal lines (for example, data line 211 and clock line 212) are arranged together, and an enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and a signal are arranged. A ground wire is placed between the wires. Therefore, by shielding a plurality of signal lines with the ground line, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line can be prevented or suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) includes a predetermined area 201 in which the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and a plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel. In the predetermined area 201, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) and the signal line on the side closer to the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) is larger than the distance between the plurality of signal lines. wide. Therefore, in the predetermined area 201 where the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel and interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) is originally likely to occur, it is possible to make it difficult for interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) to occur. it can.

In the fourth embodiment, the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100) includes a connector portion 160 for connecting to another substrate (for example, a relay substrate 70) on which a predetermined circuit is installed. The connector unit 160 is formed from a plurality of signal terminals to which a plurality of signal lines are connected, an enable terminal (or reset terminal) to which the enable line 214 (or reset line 216) is connected, and an enable terminal (or reset terminal). Also has a ground terminal (GND) close to the signal terminal. Therefore, the ground terminal (GND) can widen the distance between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal, and prevent interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal. Or it can be suppressed. Further, the distance between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line can be widened, and interference between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game), which is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game is a special result. Special game state can be generated. The game control means (for example, the game control device 100) performs necessary arithmetic processing by the game control program storage means (for example, ROM111b) for storing the game control program (for example, the interrupt processing program related to the timer interrupt processing) and the game control program. It includes arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a). The arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) can output a test signal (for example, a test firing test signal) related to the game machine 10 by serial communication by the game control program (output processing (A1306)).

Therefore, in the game control means (for example, the game control device 100), the number of wires (number of signals) and the number of terminals (number of pins) of the connector are reduced, and a sufficient space (place) for arranging electronic parts and the like can be secured, and the cost is reduced. It also leads to reduction. In the case of parallel communication, since it is necessary to provide wiring and terminals according to the type of data to be transmitted, the number of wirings (number of signals) and the number of terminals (number of pins) of the connector become large.

In the fourth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) takes in the signals from the switches (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the grand prize opening switch 39a), and then serially communicates as a test signal. It can be output with. Therefore, even if the number of switches differs depending on the model of the game machine 10, the signal from the switch is taken in by the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU111a) and output as a test signal by serial communication, which is necessary for parallel communication. The wiring can be reduced, and the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) can be easily shared between different models.

In the fourth embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a relay means (for example, a relay board 70) that converts a test signal as a serial data signal into a parallel data signal and then outputs the test signal to a test device for performing the test. Therefore, it becomes easy to standardize the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) between different models only by preparing the wiring necessary for serial communication in advance in the relay means (for example, the relay board 70).

In the fourth embodiment, the serial data signal from the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) is converted into a parallel data signal, and the light emitting unit (for example, the LED of the batch display device 50) or the solenoid (for example, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, the general electric power) It is provided with driving means (for example, driver IC chips 156, 157, drivers 138a-138d, 150) that can be output as a driving signal for the solenoid 37c). The arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) outputs a serial data signal to the driving means from the first serial port (for example, serial port 173a), and outputs the serial data signal to the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) to the second serial port (for example). For example, it is output from the serial port 173b).

Therefore, even if the number of solenoids differs depending on the model of the game machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is output from the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) by serial communication, so that the wiring required for parallel communication is reduced. This makes it easier to standardize the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models. Further, since the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) outputs the serial data signal to the drive means and the serial data signal to the relay means from separate serial ports, the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) includes data to both the drive means and the relay means. There is no need to create a serial data signal, and output processing to the drive means and relay means is simplified.

Further, as described above, the arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) sends a serial data signal to the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) to a second serial port (for example, a serial port) different from the first serial port (for example, serial port 173a). Output from 173b). Therefore, even if the parts related to the test firing test (for example, the buffer 133 and the connector portion 160 as described above) are not mounted at the time of mass production (other than at the time of inspection), the first serial port (for example, the serial port 173a) is used. It does not affect the control of the external information terminal 71, the batch display device 50, the solenoids 39b, 37c, 86b, the performance display device 152, etc., which are connected via the drive means (for example, drivers 138a-138d, 150).

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop result of the game is a special result, the game machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player outputs a test signal (for example, a test firing test signal) related to the game machine 10. A board (for example, a main board 100, a relay board 70) having a signal wiring (for example, a data line 211, a clock line 212, and an enable line 214) is provided. On the board, the signal wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched between a plurality of ground wires (for example, ground wires 222a-222d). Therefore, the signal wiring is shielded, and it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which noise or interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) on the signal wiring adversely affects the test of the gaming machine.

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop result of the game is a special result, the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player enables the operation of a predetermined circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion circuit 192). A board (for example, a main board 100, a relay board 70) having an enable wiring (for example, an enable line 214) capable of transmitting an enable signal to be used is provided. On the board, the enable wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings (for example, ground wires 222a-222d). Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) occurs between the enable wiring and other wiring and the predetermined circuit malfunctions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is a reset signal for resetting a predetermined circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion circuit 192). A board (for example, a main board 100, a relay board 70) having a reset wiring (for example, a reset line 216) capable of transmitting a signal is provided. On the board, the reset wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) occurs between the reset wiring and other wiring and the predetermined circuit malfunctions.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

10 Game machine 25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable prize device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
70 Relay board 71 External information terminal 72a 1st proximity switch 72b 2nd proximity switch 72c 3rd proximity switch 72d 4th proximity switch 100 Game control device (main board)
152 Performance display device 160, 162 Connector part 173a, 173b Serial port 174a, 174b Serial signal line 191 Buffer 192 Serial parallel conversion circuit 200 Payout control device 201 Predetermined area 211 Data line 212 Clock line 214 Enable line 216 Reset line 300 Production control device (Sub-board)
800 rotating body unit 801 tray part,
802 Rolling surface 805 Accommodating part 806 Extension part 807 Guide groove 810 Rotating stage 811 Rolling surface 812 Notch (holding part)
820 sluice valve 830 Obstacle nail 840 Rebound member 850 Sorting device 851 1st branch flow path 853 1st switching valve 860 1st sorting unit 864 2nd intake flow path 865 2nd branch flow path 866 2nd switching valve 870 2nd sorting unit 871 (871A-871D) Sorting mechanism 872 (872A-872D) Introductory port 873 (873A-873D) Discharge port 875 Third switching valve 876 Rotating member 883 Stopper member 890 Second rotating stage 891 Second notch (second notch) 2 holding part)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the game stop result is a special result.
A plurality of signal lines connected to a plurality of signal terminals to communicate with a predetermined circuit, a reset line connected to a reset terminal to reset the predetermined circuit, and a reset line connected to an enable terminal to enable the operation of the predetermined circuit. Equipped with a board to which the enable wire is wired
In the substrate, a distance between the signal line closer to the reset line and the reset line, widely than the minimum interval between the plurality of signal lines, the side of the signal close to the enable line and the enable line The distance between the lines is wider than the minimum distance between the plurality of signal lines.
A gaming machine characterized in that a ground terminal is arranged between the reset terminal and the plurality of signal terminals. The plurality of signal lines include a clock line and a data line for performing serial communication, and include the clock line and the data line.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the data line transmits a test signal relating to the gaming machine.

Images